>> Owner's Manual - Daimler AG

>> Owner's Manualsmart fortwo coupé and smart fortwo cabrio electric drive

É4535841112"ËÍ

4535

8411

12

Ord

er n

o. 6

522

0254

02

Part

no.

453

584

11

12Ed

itio

n Ä

J201

7-1b

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Ow

ner

's M

anu

al, s

mar

t fo

rtw

o co

up

é an

d s

mar

t fo

rtw

o ca

bri

o el

ectr

ic d

rive

Publication details

Internet

Further information about smart vehiclesand about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.smart.comhttp://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOwner's Manual to the technical documen-tation team at the following address:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

Symbols in the Owner's ManualThe following symbols are used in this Own-er's Manual:

G WARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental note

Environmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally awareactions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i These symbols indicate useful instruc-tions or further information that could behelpful to you.

X Instructions that must be followed.

X Several consecutive symbols indicate aninstruction with several consecutive steps.

(Y page) Further information on a topic

YY A warning or an instruction that is con-tinued on the next page.Display text: Display text in the instru-ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys-tem or the smart Media-System.

As at 13.06.2017

About this Owner's ManualBefore you first drive off, read this Owner'sManual carefully and familiarise yourselfwith your vehicle. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructionsand warning notices in this manual. Disre-garding them may lead to damage to thevehicle or personal injury.This Owner's Manual provides informationon the most important functions of yourvehicle.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may vary according to:

RModelROrderRCountry variantRAvailabilityThe illustrations in this manual show a left-hand-drive vehicle. On right-hand-drivevehicles, the layout of components and con-trols differs accordingly.smart is constantly updating its vehicles tothe state of the art.smart therefore reserves the right to intro-duce changes in the following areas:

RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresTherefore, the description may differ fromyour vehicle in some cases.Integral parts of the vehicle include:

ROwner's ManualRService BookletREquipment-dependent SupplementsThese documents should be kept in the vehi-cle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, alwayspass all documents on to the new owner.Your Owner's Manuals:

Digital on the InternetThe Owner's Manual on the Internetprovides you with convenient access toall the information relevant to yourvehicle and multimedia system. It alsooffers helpful animations, excitingbackground information and a widevariety of search options.Digital as an appUsing the smart guides app, you can callup all of the information relevant to

your vehicle and multimedia systemonline on your phone or as a downloadregardless of the status of your networkconnection. Available for smartphonesor tablets.

QR codes for the smart guides app.

Apple® iOS

Android™

Please note that the smart guides app maynot currently be available in your country.

4535841112 É4535841112"ËÍ

Index ......................................................... 4

Introduction ........................................... 20Protecting the environment ................. 20smart genuine parts .............................. 20Warranty for the smart Audio-Sys-tem and smart Media-System .............. 21Vehicle equipment ................................. 21Operating safety .................................... 21QR codes for rescue card ....................... 25Data stored in the vehicle .................... 25Copyright information .......................... 27

At a glance .............................................. 28Cockpit .................................................... 28Multifunction steering wheel .............. 29Centre console with drawer .................. 30Overhead control panel ......................... 31Door control panel ................................. 32Displays shown in the instrumentcluster and the display ......................... 33

Safety ...................................................... 34Occupant safety ..................................... 34Children in the vehicle ......................... 40Pets in the vehicle ................................. 51Driving safely ........................................ 51

Entering and setting up ........................ 54Understanding functions of the key ... 54Opening the door ................................... 54Correct driver's seat position ............... 54Adjusting the seats ............................... 55Adjusting the steering wheel ............... 56Adjusting the mirrors ............................ 57

Driving ..................................................... 59Starting the engine ............................... 59Pulling away .......................................... 59Automatic transmission ........................ 61Using the turn signals .......................... 62Acoustic presence indicator ................. 62Radar-based recuperation ................... 62Driving economically ............................ 63

Braking correctly ................................... 66Driving on wet roads ............................. 67Winter driving ........................................ 67Lane Keeping Assist .............................. 67Cruise control and limiter .................... 68Charging the high-voltage battery ..... 69

Ensuring good visibility ........................ 79Switching on the lighting ..................... 79Adjusting the lighting .......................... 80Using the interior lighting ................... 81Using the windscreen wipers ............... 81Folding the sun visor to the side ......... 83

Feeling comfortable in the vehicleinterior .................................................... 84Locking and unlocking the doorsfrom the inside ....................................... 84Understanding the reversing fea-ture .......................................................... 85Opening and closing the windows ....... 85Using the soft top (smart fortwocabrio) ..................................................... 86Fitting and removing the draughtstop (smart fortwo cabrio) .................... 89Operating the climate control sys-tem ........................................................... 89Activating/deactivating the seatheating and steering wheel heating ... 92Using the accessories ........................... 93

Parking and getting out ........................ 95Parking .................................................... 95Using the parking aid ........................... 95Using the reversing camera ................. 95Locking the vehicle ............................... 97Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system ................................ 98

Operating the on-board computer ....... 99Overview of the on-board computer ... 99Calling up displays .............................. 100Setting values ...................................... 102

2 Contents

Using the smart Audio-System ........... 105Operating and setting the smartAudio-System ....................................... 105Listening to the radio .......................... 107Using a mobile phone .......................... 109Operating external data storagemedia ..................................................... 111

Using the smart Media-System .......... 113Operating and setting up the smartMedia-System ...................................... 113Listening to the radio .......................... 118Calling up electric drive displays ..... 119Using a mobile phone .......................... 120Connecting and operating externaldata storage media .............................. 124Viewing images .................................... 126Video playback ..................................... 127Using the navigation system ............. 127Managing apps ..................................... 137

Using online offerings ......................... 139Online access to the vehicle ............... 139Using smart "ready to" services ........ 139

Loading and stowing ............................ 141Stowing small objects ......................... 141Stowing luggage and large objects ... 142Using the boot separator .................... 144Removing/fitting the chargingcable bag ............................................... 145

Maintenance and care .......................... 147Useful information ............................... 147Removing/fitting the subwoofer ........ 147Opening and closing the servicecover ...................................................... 147Checking service products and top-ping up .................................................. 149Checking wheels and tyres ................. 150Changing a wheel ................................ 151Using the tyre pressure monitor ....... 154Checking the tyre pressures .............. 155Using winter tyres ............................... 156Using snow chains ............................... 157

Changing the window wiper blades .. 157Cleaning the vehicle ............................ 158Observing service due dates .............. 162Parking up the vehicle ........................ 163

Dealing with accidents and break-downs .................................................... 164Securing the vehicle in the event ofan accident or a breakdown ............... 164Removing the first-aid kit .................. 166Removing the fire extinguisher ......... 167Removing the vehicle tool tray .......... 167Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit .. 167Towing the vehicle .............................. 170Manually releasing the selectorlever lock .............................................. 172Replacing the bulbs ............................ 172Changing fuses ..................................... 175Replacing the key battery .................. 176Opening a door with the emergencyrelease ................................................... 177Locking the doors in an emergency .. 177

Practical advice .................................... 179Notes on display messages ................ 179Locking and unlocking ........................ 179Visibility, occupants, airbags ............ 180Engine, brakes, transmission ............. 182Charging process ................................. 185Driving safety systems ....................... 188Driver assistance systems .................. 193Battery, lights, heating ....................... 196smart Audio-System and smartMedia-System ...................................... 198

Technical data ...................................... 200Obtaining technical data .................... 200Reading vehicle data ........................... 200Service products .................................. 202Bulb types ............................................. 202Fuse allocation ..................................... 203Radio type approvals for the tyrepressure monitors ................................ 205Installing two-way radios andmobile phones ...................................... 206

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...

12 V socketsee Socket (12 V)

A

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Display message ............................ 188Function/notes ................................. 51Warning lamp (yellow) .................. 188

Accelerationsee Kickdown

Acoustic presence indicatorDeactivating/activating ................. 62Function/notes ................................. 62

Active Brake AssistActivating or deactivating ............. 53Display message ............................ 193Forward collision warningfunction ............................................ 52Function/notes ................................. 51Important safety notes ................... 52Switching off/on (on-boardcomputer with colour display) ..... 103Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer with monochromedisplay) ........................................... 102

Adjusting the headlamp range ............. 80Air conditioning

General notes ................................... 89Air distribution

Setting (automatic climate con-trol) .................................................... 90

Air pressuresee Tyre pressure

Air ventsImportant safety notes ................... 91Setting ............................................... 91

Air ventssee Air vents

Air-recirculation modeSwitching on/off (automaticclimate control) ................................ 90

AirbagEnabling and disabling thepassenger airbag* ........................... 44Headbag ............................................ 38Installation locations ...................... 38

Limited protection ........................... 39Overview ........................................... 38PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ................................................. 39

AirbagsFront airbag (driver, frontpassenger) ........................................ 38Kneebag ............................................ 38Protection provided ......................... 38Sidebag ............................................. 38Triggering ........................................ 35Windowbag ....................................... 38

AlarmAnti-theft alarm system ................. 98Switching off .................................... 98

AlertsSetting (Audio-System) ................ 108

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness .................. 104Switching on/off ............................ 103

Android Auto™Using ............................................... 123

Animalssee Pets in the vehicle

Anti-entrapment featuresee Reversing feature

Anti-lock Braking Systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-skid chainssee Snow chains

Anti-theft alarm systemPriming/deactivating ...................... 98Switching off the alarm .................. 98

AppsDisplaying/calling up ................... 138General notes ................................. 137Installing ........................................ 137

Aquaplaning ........................................... 67Ashtray .................................................... 93Audio-System

Connecting a mobile phone .......... 109Connecting Bluetooth® audiodevices ............................................ 112Connecting external audioequipment (AUX) ............................ 112Operating ........................................ 105Operating the radio ....................... 107Operating via the mobile phone .. 106

4 Index

Overview ......................................... 105Setting interruption for news ...... 108Setting the time ............................. 107Smartphone bracket ...................... 105System settings ............................. 106Troubleshooting ............................. 198Using external devices .................. 105Volume/sound settings ................. 107Warranty ........................................... 21

Authorised workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Automatic climate controlActivating/deactivating air-recirculation mode .......................... 90Cooling with air dehumidifica-tion .................................................... 90Demisting the rear window ............ 91Demisting the windscreen .............. 90Increasing/decreasing theblower speed .................................... 90Setting air distribution .................. 90Setting the temperature ................. 90Switching on/off .............................. 90Windows misted up ......................... 91

Automatic headlamp mode .................... 79Automatic transmission

Display message ............................ 184Engaging neutral ............................. 61Engaging reverse gear .................... 61Engaging the park position ............ 61Important safety notes ................... 61Kickdown .......................................... 61Manually releasing the selectorlever lock ........................................ 172Pulling away .................................... 59Starting the engine ......................... 59Transmission positions .................. 61

AUX jackAudio-System ................................. 105Media-System ................................ 113

B

BatteryDisplay message ............................ 196

Batterysee High-voltage battery

Battery (key)Important safety notes ................. 176Replacing ........................................ 176

Battery (vehicle)see High-voltage battery

Beltsee Seat belt

Belt tensionerActivation ......................................... 35

Belt warning ........................................... 37Blower speed

Increasing or decreasing (auto-matic climate control) ..................... 90

Bluetooth®

Activating mobile phone(Audio-System) .............................. 109Activating the mobile phone(Media-System) .............................. 120Authorising function for mobilephone (Audio-System) .................. 109Connecting a device (Media-System) ........................................... 125Operating (Audio-System) ............ 112Switching on/off (Media-Sys-tem) ................................................. 120

Bonnet (front)see Service cover

Bootsee Tailgate

Boot separatorFitting ............................................. 144Removing ........................................ 145

BrakeEBD ..................................................... 53

Brake Assistsee Active Brake Assist

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 183

Brake force distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 173

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 196

BrakesABS ..................................................... 51Driving tips ...................................... 66

Index 5

Important safety notes ................... 66Parking brake ................................... 60Warning lamp ................................. 183

BrakingBraking on steep downhill gra-dients ................................................ 66Braking on wet road surfaces ........ 66Limited braking performanceon salt-treated roads ...................... 66

BreakdownTowing away .................................. 170see Flat tyre

C

Carsee Vehicle

Car keysee Key

Car washsee Care

Car wash (care) ..................................... 159Care

Automatic car wash ....................... 159Carpets ............................................ 162Cleaning the interior ..................... 161Cleaning the roof lining (smartfortwo coupé) .................................. 162Display ............................................ 161Exterior ........................................... 158Exterior lighting ............................ 161High-pressure cleaner .................. 159High-voltage battery ...................... 73Interior ............................................ 161Matt paintwork .............................. 158Notes ............................................... 158Paint ................................................ 161Plastic trim ..................................... 162Reversing camera .......................... 159Roof lining ...................................... 161Seat belt .......................................... 161Seat cover ....................................... 162Selector lever ................................. 161Sensors ............................................ 160Soft-top system ............................. 161Steering wheel ............................... 161Trim pieces ..................................... 162Washing by hand ........................... 159

Wheels ............................................. 160Windows .......................................... 160Wiper blades ................................... 160

Central lockingAutomatic locking ............................ 84Locking/unlocking (key) ................. 97

Centre consoleOverview ........................................... 30

Changing the routeNavigation ...................................... 131

Charge cableDisplay message ............................ 185

Charge level display .............................. 64Charging

see Charging the high-voltagebattery

Charging cableConnection ........................................ 78Control panel .................................... 75Disconnecting .................................. 78Heating up ........................................ 73Storing .............................................. 78Version 1 (mode 2) ........................... 76Version 2 (mode 2) ........................... 76

Charging cable bagRemoving/fitting ........................... 145

Charging currentDisplay messages .......................... 185

Child restraint systemSuitability of the seats forattaching belt-secured childrestraint systems ............................ 47Suitability of the seats forattaching ISOFIX child restraintsystems ............................................. 48

Child seatForward-facing restraint sys-tem ..................................................... 46i-Size ................................................. 42ISOFIX ................................................ 42On the front-passenger seat .......... 45Rearward-facing restraint sys-tem ..................................................... 46Recommendations ............................ 49Suitability of the seats for i-Size child restraint systems .......... 49Suitable positions ............................ 47Top Tether ........................................ 43

6 Index

ChildrenRestraint systems ............................ 40

Cigarette lighter ..................................... 93Cleaning

see CareClimate control

Automatic air conditioning ............ 90Setting the air vents ....................... 91

ClockSetting the time (Media-Sys-tem) ................................................. 116

CockpitOverview ........................................... 28

Collision warningWarning lamp ................................. 193

COMAND displayCleaning .......................................... 161

Connectivity manager .......................... 138Constant headlamp mode

see Daytime driving lightsConsumption details

Calling up (Media-System) ........... 120Controlling speed

see Cruise controlCoolant

Checking coolant level and top-ping up ............................................ 149Important safety notes ................. 149

Coolingsee Climate control

Cooling with air dehumidificationAutomatic climate control .............. 90

Copyright ................................................ 27Cornering light function ........................ 80Cover (front)

see Service coverCrosswind Assist ..................................... 53Cruise control

Activating ......................................... 69Buttons .............................................. 69Calling up the speed last stored .... 69Cancelling cruise control ................ 69Deactivating ..................................... 69Display message (colour dis-play) ................................................ 195Display message (monochromedisplay) ........................................... 195Function/notes ................................. 68

General notes ................................... 68Important safety notes ................... 68Increasing/decreasing thespeed ................................................. 69Storing and maintaining cur-rent speed ......................................... 69

Cup holderCentre console ................................ 141Important safety notes ................. 141

Cup holdersee Cup holder

D

DAB radiosee Digital radio

Dashboardsee Cockpit

Datasee Technical data

Data sharingManaging ........................................ 138

Data storage mediasee External data storage media

Daytime driving lights ........................... 79Dealership

see Qualified specialist workshopDeclarations of conformity .................... 22Diagnostics connection .......................... 23Digital radio

Audio-System ................................. 108Displaying services (Media-System) ........................................... 119EPG (Electronic ProgrammeGuide) (Media-System) ................. 119Frequency range (Audio-Sys-tem) ................................................. 107Intellitext™ (Media-System) ........ 119Introducing (Audio-System) ........ 108Media-System ................................ 118Setting interruption for news(Audio-System) .............................. 108Slide show (Media-System) .......... 119

Digital speedometerDisplaying ...................................... 103

Dipped-beam headlampsDriving abroad ................................. 81Replacing bulbs ............................. 172

Index 7

Switching on/off .............................. 79Display

Colour ................................................ 99Monochrome ..................................... 99

Display messageColour display ................................ 102

Display messagesGeneral information ...................... 179

Disposal of old devices .......................... 73Distance recorder

Monochrome display ..................... 100Distance recorder

see Trip meterDoor

Automatic locking (switch) ............ 84Central locking/unlocking (key) .... 97Control panel .................................... 32Display message ............................ 180Emergency locking ........................ 177Emergency unlocking ................... 177Opening (from the inside) ............... 84Unlocking (key) ................................ 54

Double lock function .............................. 84Draught stop

Inserting and removing .................. 89Driver's door

see DoorDriver's seat

see SeatDriving abroad

Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 81Driving noise

see Acoustic presence indicatorDriving safety system

Active Brake Assist .......................... 51Crosswind Assist .............................. 53Driving safety system limita-tions .................................................. 51EBD (electronic brake force dis-tribution) .......................................... 53

Driving safety systemsABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .... 51ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ................................................. 53ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ................................................... 53

Driving systemsCruise control ................................... 68

Lane Keeping Assist ........................ 67Speed limiter .................................... 68

Driving tipsAquaplaning ..................................... 67Brakes ................................................ 66Downhill gradient ............................ 66Driving in winter ............................. 67Driving on flooded roads ................ 67Driving on wet roads ....................... 67Icy road surfaces ............................. 67Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ...................................... 66Pulling away .................................... 59Symmetrical dipped beam .............. 81see Economical driving

Dynamic handling control systemsee ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

E

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Function/notes ................................. 53Indicator lamp ................................ 188

ECO modeSwitching on/off .............................. 63

eco scoreCalling up ......................................... 65Comparing the trip .......................... 65Display (colour display) ................. 65Display (monochrome display) ...... 65Evaluating the current trip ............ 65Function/notes ................................. 64Resetting data .................................. 66Saving the trip ................................. 65

Economical drivingeco score display ............................. 64General information ........................ 63

Electrical fusessee Fuses

Electromagnetic compatibilityDeclaration of conformity ............... 22

Electronic Brake-force Distributionsee EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

8 Index

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Emergency assistance systemAutomatic emergency call ............ 165Button in the overhead controlpanel ............................................... 164Manual emergency call ................. 165Overview ......................................... 164Requirements ................................. 164Transmitted data ........................... 164

Emergency releaseDriver's door ................................... 177

Emergency unlockingVehicle ............................................ 177

EnergyDisplaying the current con-sumption (colour display) ............ 101

Energy consumptionHigh-voltage battery ...................... 72

Energy flow displayCalling up (Media-System) ........... 119Colour display ................................ 101

EngineStarting problems .......................... 182Starting the engine with the key .. 59Stopping ............................................ 95

Engine electronicsNotes ................................................. 21

Entering a destinationNavigation ...................................... 128

Environmental protectionHigh-voltage battery ...................... 20Returning an end-of-life vehi-cle ...................................................... 20

EPG (Electronic Program Guide)Displaying (Audio-System) .......... 109

EPG (Electronic Programme Guide)Displaying (Media-System) .......... 119

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)Crosswind Assist .............................. 53Display message ............................ 189General notes ................................... 53Important safety guidelines .......... 53Warning and indicator lamps ...... 189

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ......... 53Exterior lighting

Cleaning .......................................... 161see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting .......................................... 58Out of position (troubleshoot-ing) .................................................. 180

External audio equipment (AUX)Connecting (Audio-System) ......... 112

External data carriersConnection (Media-System) ......... 125Operation (Media-System) ........... 125

External data storage mediaConnecting (Audio-System) ......... 105Operating (Audio-System) ............ 111

F

Factory settingsResetting (Media-System) ............ 116

FavouritesCreating (Media-System) .............. 117Managing (Media-System) ........... 117

Fire extinguisher .................................. 167First-aid kit .......................................... 166Fitting a wheel

Fitting a wheel ............................... 153Preparing the vehicle .................... 152Raising the vehicle ........................ 152Removing a wheel .......................... 152Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 166

Fitting/removingfront wheel arch cover .................. 173

Flat tyrePreparing the vehicle .................... 164TIREFIT kit ...................................... 167

Floormat .................................................. 93Foglamps

Switching on/off .............................. 80Fording

On flooded roads .............................. 67Forward collision warning function

Function/notes ................................. 52Frequencies

Mobile phone .................................. 206Two-way radio ............................... 206

Index 9

Front airbag ............................................ 38Front cover

see Service coverFront wheel arch

Fitting/removing the cover .......... 173Front-passenger front airbag deac-tivation system

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ................................................. 39Status indicator ............................... 39

Front-passenger seatsee Seat

Frontal area coversee Service cover

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 203Before changing ............................. 175Dashboard fuse box ....................... 175Important safety notes ................. 175Opening the fuse box ..................... 175

G

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts .............. 20Glove compartment .............................. 142

H

Hand brakesee Parking brake

Hands-free systemsee Mobile phone

Hazard warning lampsSwitching on/off ............................ 164

Headbag .................................................. 38Headlamp flasher ................................... 80Headlamps

see Automatic headlamp modeHeating

see Climate controlHigh-voltage battery

Battery care ...................................... 73Charge level ...................................... 64Charge level display ........................ 64Charging (charging station) ........... 74Charging (mains socket) ................. 78Charging (wallbox) .......................... 74Charging cable heating up ............. 73Discharged battery .......................... 72

Display message ............................ 196Energy consumption ....................... 72Important safety notes ................... 69Indicator lamp (vehicle socket) ..... 74Method of operation ........................ 72Outside temperatures ...................... 72Problems during charging ............ 185Protective equipment ...................... 73Range ................................................ 72READY indicator ............................. 196Terms of use ..................................... 73Vehicle socket .................................. 74Warning and indicator lamps ...... 196

High-voltage electrical systemAutomatic switch-off ...................... 25Danger of electric shock ................. 24Operating safety .............................. 24Vehicle fire ....................................... 25

Home addressEntering and saving ...................... 129

Home address (navigation)see Home address

I

i-TrafficTraffic announcements ................. 119

i‑Size child seat securing systems ....... 42Ice warning

Warning lamp (colour display) .... 195Warning lamp (monochromedisplay) ........................................... 195

Ignition locksee Key positions

ImagePlayback (Media-System) ............. 126

Immobiliser ............................................. 98Indicator and warning lamp

Restraint system ............................ 181Indicator and warning lamps

Battery ............................................ 196Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview ........................................... 33Warning and indicator lamps ........ 33

Instrument cluster lightingSetting ............................................. 103

10 Index

Instrument lightingsee Instrument cluster lighting

Intellitext™Setting (Media-System) ................ 119Switching on (Audio-System) ...... 109

Interior lighting ..................................... 81Adjusting the ambient lighting(colour display) ................................ 81Changing bulbs .............................. 175Setting the ambient lighting ....... 103Switching on/off .............................. 81

Intermittent wipe ................................... 82ISOFIX child seat securing system ....... 42

J

JackUsing ............................................... 152

K

KeyChanging the battery .................... 176Loss .................................................. 179Opening the soft top ........................ 87Position in the ignition lock .......... 59Problem (malfunction) .................. 179Starting the engine ......................... 59

Key positions (ignition lock) ................. 59Keyboard

Adjusting (Media-System) ............ 115Kickdown ................................................. 61Kneebag ................................................... 38

L

Lampssee Warning and indicator lamps

Lane Keeping AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 68Function/information ...................... 67Warning lamp (colour display) .... 195Warning lamp (monochromedisplay) ........................................... 195

Lane recognition system (auto-matic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLanguage

Selecting (Media-System) ............ 115

Language (on-board computer) .......... 104Licence plate lighting

Changing bulbs .............................. 174Light

see Replacing bulbsLighting

see LightsLights

Automatic headlamp mode ............. 79Cornering light function ................. 80Dipped-beam headlamps ................ 79Display message ............................ 197Driving abroad ................................. 81Foglamps .......................................... 80Hazard warning lamps .................. 164Headlamp flasher ............................ 80Headlamp range ............................... 80Light switch ..................................... 79Main-beam headlamps ................... 79Rear foglamp .................................... 80Setting the ambient lighting ....... 103Side lamps ........................................ 80Turn signals ..................................... 62see Interior lighting

LimiterCalling up the stored limitspeed ................................................. 69Cancelling ......................................... 69Deactivating ..................................... 69Display message (colour dis-play) ................................................ 195Exceeding the stored limitspeed ................................................. 68General notes ................................... 68Increasing or reducing thestored limit speed ............................ 69

Limiting the speedsee Speed limiter

Loading guidelines ............................... 142Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ......................................... 84Emergency locking ........................ 177From inside (central lockingbutton) .............................................. 84

Loudspeakersee Subwoofer

Index 11

M

M+S tyres (winter tyres) ...................... 156Main-beam headlamps

Replacing bulbs ............................. 172Switching on/off .............................. 79

Making a callMedia-System ................................ 121

Malfunction messagesee Display message

Manually releasing the selectorlever lock (automatic transmission) ... 172Matt finish (cleaning instructions) .... 158Media-System

Adjusting the on-screen key-board ............................................... 115Buttons on the multifunctionsteering wheel ............................... 113Calling up menus ........................... 115Connectivity manager ................... 138Consumption details ...................... 120Controls ........................................... 113Creating favourites ........................ 117Data connectivity .......................... 137Display settings ............................. 115eco score ........................................... 65Enabling data sharing .................. 138Energy flow display ...................... 119Home screen ................................... 114Image playback .............................. 126Installing apps ............................... 137Navigation menu ........................... 127Navigation system ......................... 127Operating the radio ....................... 118Overview ......................................... 113Problem solving ............................. 198Reversing camera ............................ 95Selecting the home screen dis-play ................................................. 116Selecting the language ................. 115Setting the time ............................. 116Setting warning tones ................... 117Status and information ................. 116Switching on/off ............................ 114System menu .................................. 115System settings ............................. 115Video playback ............................... 127Volume/tone settings .................... 116

Warranty ........................................... 21Message memory (colour display) ...... 102MirrorLink™

Using ............................................... 122Mirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirror

Mobile phoneConnecting (Audio-System) ......... 109Connecting (Media-System) ......... 120Downloading data automati-cally (Media-System) .................... 121Frequencies .................................... 206Installation ..................................... 206Loading and updating the tele-phone book (Audio-System) ......... 109Making a call (Media-System) ..... 121Setting the sound (Audio-Sys-tem) ................................................. 110Transmission output (maxi-mum) ................................................ 206Using Android Auto™ .................... 123Using MirrorLink™ ........................ 122Using voice control (Audio-System) ........................................... 111Using voice control (Media-System) ........................................... 124

Model seriessee Vehicle identification plate

Multi-functional seatsee Seat

Multifunction steering wheelOverview ........................................... 29

N

NavigationAlternative route ........................... 131Changing the route ........................ 131Current location ............................. 134Destination memory ...................... 129Displaying the reachabilitymap .................................................. 134Entering a charging station as adestination ..................................... 129Entering a destination .................. 128Entering a destination byaddress ............................................ 128

12 Index

Entering a destination usinggeo-coordinates ............................. 129Entering a destination usingthe map ........................................... 128Entering a POI ................................ 129Entering/saving your homeaddress ............................................ 129Reading map data .......................... 127Route details .................................. 131Selecting a destination from thelist of last destinations ................. 129Setting route planning .................. 132Setting the voice ............................ 136Starting ........................................... 127Starting route calculation ............ 130Switching announcementson/off ............................................... 132System settings ............................. 136TomTom Services ........................... 134Traffic information ........................ 133Troubleshooting ............................. 198Way points ...................................... 131

O

Occupant safetyAirbags .............................................. 38Belt warning ..................................... 37Children in the vehicle ................... 40PASSENGER AIRBAG indicatorlamp ................................................... 39Pets in the vehicle ........................... 51Restraint system ............................. 34Restraint system warning lamp .... 34Seat belts .......................................... 36

On-board computerCalling up displays (colour dis-play) ................................................ 100Calling up displays (mono-chrome display) ............................. 100Important safety notes ................... 99Operation .......................................... 99Overview ........................................... 99Selecting the language ................. 104Setting and resetting values(colour display) .............................. 102Setting and resetting values(monochrome display) .................. 102

On-board diagnostics interfacesee Diagnostics connection

On-screen keyboardAdjusting (Media-System) ............ 115

Online access ........................................ 139Operating instructions

Vehicle equipment ........................... 21Operating safety

Declaration of conformity ............... 22High-voltage electrical system ..... 24

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Outside temperature displayColour display .................................. 99Monochrome display ....................... 99Setting the units ............................ 103

Outside temperaturesHigh-voltage battery ...................... 72

Overhead control panel ......................... 31Overvoltage protection

High-voltage battery ...................... 73

P

Paint code ............................................. 200Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ...... 161Park brake

see Parking brakeParking .................................................... 95

Engaging park position .................. 61Important safety notes ................... 95Parking aid ....................................... 95Parking brake ................................... 60Reversing camera ............................ 95

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 183General information ........................ 60Warning lamp ................................. 183

PASSENGER AIR BAGDisabling/activating ....................... 44Indicator lamps ................................ 39

Passenger airbagEnabling and disabling* ................. 44Problem (malfunction)* ................. 181

Passenger seatFolding down .................................. 144

Pets in the vehicle ................................. 51Power display ......................................... 64

Index 13

Power windowssee Side windows

Pre-entry climate control andcharging

Colour display ................................ 102Pre-entry climate control at depar-ture time

Smart-Charging ............................... 91Pre-entry climate control at time ofdeparture

Setting departure time .................... 91Protection against theft

Anti-theft alarm system ................. 98Protection of the environment

General notes ................................... 20Pulling away

General notes ................................... 59Hill start assist ................................ 61

Q

QR codeRescue card ...................................... 25

Qualified specialist workshop ............... 24

R

Radar-based recuperationFunction/notes ................................. 62Switching off/on (on-boardcomputer with colour display) ..... 103

RadioDisplay mode .................................. 118Displaying programme infor-mation (EPG) (Audio-System) ....... 109i-Traffic (Traffic announce-ments) ............................................. 119Operating (Audio-System) ............ 107Operation (Media-System) ........... 118

Radio textDisplaying (Audio-System) .......... 108Displaying (Media-System) .......... 119

Radio type approvalsTyre pressure monitors ................. 205

Radio-based vehicle componentsDeclaration of conformity ............... 22

Rain sensor ............................................. 82Rain/light sensor (display message) .. 196

RangeHigh-voltage battery ...................... 72

RBSsee Radar-based recuperation

Reading lamp .......................................... 81Rear foglamp

Replacing bulbs ............................. 173Switching on/off .............................. 80

Rear lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 173

Rear parking aidActivating/deactivating ................. 95Function/notes ................................. 95

Rear soft topClosing ............................................ 143Opening ........................................... 143

Rear window heatingDemisting the rear window(automatic climate control) ............ 91

Rear window wiperAutomatic rear window wiperwhen in reverse gear ....................... 82Replacing the wiper blade ............ 158Switching on/off .............................. 82

Rear-view mirror .................................... 57Anti-dazzle mode (automatic) ....... 57Dipping (manual) ............................. 57

Recharging cableIndicator lamp ................................. 75

Recuperation (radar based)Function/notes ................................. 62

Recuperation (radar-based)Switching on and off (colourdisplay) ........................................... 103

Recyclingsee Protection of the environment

Remote configurationsmart control .................................. 139

Remote query functionssmart control .................................. 139

Replacing bulbsBrake lamp ...................................... 173Dipped-beam headlamps .............. 172Fitting/removing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 173Important safety notes ................. 172LED ................................................... 174Licence plate lighting ................... 174

14 Index

Main-beam headlamps ................. 172Overview of bulb types ................. 202Rear foglamp .................................. 173Rear lamp ........................................ 173Reversing lamp .............................. 173Turn signal lamp (rear) ................. 173see Changing bulbs

Replacing lampssee Changing bulbs

Replacing the bulbTurn signal lamp (front) ............... 173

Replacing the bulbsInterior lighting ............................ 175

Rescue card ............................................. 25Restraint system

Display message ............................ 181Function during an accident .......... 35Limited protection ........................... 34Malfunction ...................................... 34Operational readiness ..................... 34Protection provided ......................... 34System self-test .............................. 34Warning lamp ................................. 181Warning lamp (function) ................ 34

Reverse gearEngaging (automatic transmis-sion) ................................................... 61

Reversing cameraCleaning instructions ................... 159Function/notes ................................. 96Guide lines in the display .............. 96Settings ............................................. 97Switching on/off .............................. 97

Reversing featureSide windows .................................... 85

Reversing lampReplacing bulbs ............................. 173

Roof lining and carpets (cleaninginstructions) ......................................... 162

S

SafetyChildren in the vehicle ................... 40see Occupant safetysee Operating safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety system

SD cardConnecting (Media-System) ......... 125Reading map data .......................... 127SD card slot ..................................... 113

SeatCorrect driver's seat position ......... 54Folding passenger seat down ....... 144

Seat beltLimited protection ........................... 36Protection provided ......................... 36

Seat beltsCleaning .......................................... 161Fastening .......................................... 37Releasing .......................................... 37Warning lamp ................................. 181Warning lamp (function) ................ 37

Seat heating ............................................ 92Seats

Adjusting (manually) ...................... 55Cleaning the cover ......................... 162Important safety notes ................... 55Switching seat heating on/off ........ 92

Selector leverCleaning .......................................... 161

Selector leversee Automatic transmission

Sensors (cleaning instructions) .......... 160Service Centre

see Qualified specialist workshopService cover ........................................ 147Service display

Calling up (colour display) ........... 102Calling up (monochrome dis-play) ................................................ 100

Service due dateDisplay message ............................ 184

Service productsBrake fluid ...................................... 202Coolant (engine) ............................. 149Important safety notes ................. 149Washer fluid ................................... 202

Setting the charge currentCharging cable version 2 ................ 77

Side barsClosing the stowage space .............. 89Stowing ............................................. 87

Side lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 80

Index 15

Side sparsFitting ............................................... 88Removing .......................................... 87

Side windowsImportant safety notes ................... 85Opening/closing ............................... 86Problem (malfunction) .................. 180Resetting ......................................... 180Reversing feature ............................ 85

Sidebag .................................................... 38smart Centre

see Qualified specialist workshopsmart control

Internet ........................................... 139smart Services

Registering ..................................... 139Using ............................................... 139

Smart-ChargingFunction/notes ................................. 91

SmartphoneFitting the bracket ........................ 106Inserting/removing ....................... 106Operating the Audio-Systemvia the mobile phone ..................... 106

Smartphone ScreenSetting (Media -System) ............... 122

Snow chains .......................................... 157Socket (12 V)

Centre console .................................. 93Socket (high-voltage battery)

see Vehicle socketSoft top

Cleaning .......................................... 161Closing .............................................. 87Closing the rear soft top ............... 143Closing the stowage spacewithout the side bars ...................... 89Important safety notes ................... 86Opening ............................................. 87Opening the rear soft top .............. 143Removing the side bars .................. 87Stowing the side bars ...................... 87

SoundSetting (Audio-System) ................ 107Setting (Media-System) ................ 116

Sound generatorsee Acoustic presence indicator

Speakerssee Subwoofer

Special destinationEntry ............................................... 129

Specialist workshop ............................... 24Speed limiter

Activating ......................................... 69Functions and conditions foractivation ......................................... 68Setting limit speed .......................... 69

SpeedometerDigital ............................................... 99Displaying (digital speedome-ter) ................................................... 103General notes (digital speed-ometer) ............................................ 102see Instrument cluster

Starting (engine) .................................... 59Starting the engine

see Starting (engine)Station

Selecting a stored station(Audio-System) .............................. 108Setting (Media-System) ................ 118

Station listSetting a station from the sta-tion list (Audio-System) ............... 108Updating (Media-System) ............ 119

Station searchAudio-System ................................. 108

StationsSetting (Audio-System) ................ 107Storing (Audio-System) ................ 108

SteeringDisplay message (colour dis-play) ................................................ 193Warning lamps ............................... 193

Steering wheelAdjusting (manually) ...................... 56Button overview ............................... 29Cleaning .......................................... 161Important safety notes ................... 56

Steering wheel heatingSwitching on/off .............................. 92

Stowage areas ....................................... 141Stowage compartment in the tail-gate ........................................................ 142

16 Index

Stowage compartmentsCentre console ................................ 141Cup holder ....................................... 141Door ................................................. 141Glove compartment ........................ 141Important safety information ...... 141Spectacles compartment ............... 141

SubwooferFitting/removing ........................... 147

Sun visor ................................................. 83

T

TailgateOpening dimensions ...................... 200Opening/closing ............................. 143Warning lamp ................................. 180

Tailgate (smart fortwo cabrio)Opening/closing ............................. 143

Technical dataInformation .................................... 200Vehicle data .................................... 200

Telephone bookLoading (Audio-System) ............... 109

Telephone operationAudio-System ................................. 110

TemperatureSetting (automatic climate con-trol) .................................................... 90

TimeSetting (Audio-System) ................ 107Setting (colour display) ................ 103Setting (monochrome display) ..... 102Setting the time format (colourdisplay) ........................................... 103

TIREFIT kit ............................................ 167TomTom Services

Activating ....................................... 134Introduction ................................... 134My Services menu .......................... 135Subscription status ....................... 135Traffic information menu ............. 135

Toolsee Vehicle tool kit

Top Tether .............................................. 43Total distance recorder

Colour display ................................ 101Monochrome display ....................... 99

Setting the display unit ................ 103Touchscreen

Confirming settings with Done .... 115Operating the touchscreen ........... 114

TowingImportant safety notes ................. 170

Towing awayFitting the towing eye .................. 171Removing the towing eye ............. 171With both axles on the ground ..... 171

Traction systemsee ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Traffic reportsSwitching on/off ............................ 108

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transporting the vehicle ..................... 171Trip computer

Displaying ...................................... 101Trip meter

Colour display ................................ 101Displaying (colour display) .......... 101Displaying (monochrome dis-play) ................................................ 100

Trip metersee Trip meter

Turn signal lamp (front)Replacing the bulb ........................ 173

Turn signal lamp (rear)Replacing bulbs ............................. 173

Turn signalsReplacing the bulb ........................ 173Switching on/off .............................. 62

Turn signalssee Turn signals

Two-way radioFrequencies .................................... 206Installation ..................................... 206Transmission output (maxi-mum) ................................................ 206

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

Tyre pressureChecking/correcting ...................... 156Display message ............................ 190Important safety notes ................. 155Not reached (TIREFIT) ................... 169Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 169

Index 17

Recommended ................................ 155Tyre pressure monitor

Function/notes ............................... 154Radio type approval for the tyrepressure monitor ........................... 205Restarting ....................................... 154Starting ........................................... 103Warning lamp ................................. 190

TyresChanging a wheel .......................... 151Checking ......................................... 150Direction of rotation ...................... 153Important safety notes ................. 150M+S tyres (winter tyres) ............... 156Rules for new tyres ........................ 151Service life ...................................... 151Snow chains .................................... 157Storing ............................................ 154Tyre tread ....................................... 150see Flat tyre

U

Unit of measurement for distanceSetting ............................................. 103

UnitsSetting (on-board computer) ....... 103

UnlockingFrom inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................ 84With emergency key element ....... 177

USB deviceConnecting (Audio-System) ......... 111Connection (Media-System) ......... 125Operating (Audio-System) ............ 111

USB portAudio-System ................................. 105Media-System ................................ 113

V

ValuesSetting (colour display) ................ 102Setting (monochrome display) ..... 102

VehicleCorrect use ........................................ 25Data acquisition .............................. 25Electronics ........................................ 21Equipment ........................................ 21

Implied warranty ............................. 25Locking (in an emergency) ........... 177Locking (key) .................................... 97Operating safety .............................. 21Parking up ...................................... 163Raising ............................................ 152Registration ...................................... 24Remote configuration .................... 139Remote query functions ................ 139Securing from rolling away .......... 166Towing away .................................. 170Transporting .................................. 171Unlocking (in an emergency) ....... 177Unlocking (key) ................................ 54Vehicle data .................................... 200

Vehicle data .......................................... 200Vehicle dimensions .............................. 200Vehicle emergency locking ................. 177Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate ................. 200Vehicle key

see KeyVehicle socket

High-voltage battery ...................... 74Indicator lamp ................................. 74Problems during the chargingprocess ............................................ 185

Vehicle tool kit ..................................... 167Ventilation

see Air conditioningVideo

Playback (Media-System) ............. 127VIN ......................................................... 200Voice control system

Entering a destination in thenavigation system ......................... 128Problems with the voice controlsystem ............................................. 199Starting an application ................. 113

Voltage rangeHigh-voltage battery ...................... 72

VolumeAdjusting automatically ............... 107Setting (Audio-System) ................ 107Setting (Media-System) ................ 116

18 Index

W

Warning and indicator lampsABS ................................................... 188Active Brake Assist ........................ 193Brakes .............................................. 183Collision warning (red) ................. 193EBD ................................................... 188ESP® (yellow) .................................. 189High-voltage battery .................... 196Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 194Overview ........................................... 33Parking brake ................................. 183PASSENGER AIR BAG ........................ 39PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 181Seat belt .......................................... 181Steering ........................................... 193Tyre pressure monitor .................. 190

Warning triangle .................................. 166Wheel bolt tightening torque .............. 153Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 151Checking ......................................... 150Cleaning .......................................... 160Fitting a new wheel ....................... 153Important safety notes ................. 150Removing a wheel .......................... 152Snow chains .................................... 157Storing ............................................ 154Tightening torque ......................... 153

Windowbag .............................................. 38Windows

Cleaning .......................................... 160see Side windows

WindscreenDemisting (automatic climatecontrol) ............................................. 90

Windscreen washer fluidsee Windscreen washer system

Windscreen washer systemImportant safety notes ................. 150Topping up ..................................... 150

Windscreen wipersIntermittent wipe ............................ 82Problem (malfunction) .................. 180Rain sensor ....................................... 82Rear window wiper .......................... 82Replacing the wiper blades .......... 157

Switching on/off .............................. 81Wiping with washer fluid ............... 82

Wingsee Front wheel arch

Winter drivingGeneral notes ................................... 67

Winter operationSlippery road surfaces .................... 67Snow chains .................................... 157

Winter tyresM+S tyres ........................................ 156

Wiper bladesCleaning .......................................... 160Replacing (on the rear window) ... 158Replacing (windscreen) ................ 157

Workshopsee Qualified specialist workshop

Index 19

Protecting the environment

General notes


Daimler's declared policy is one of com-prehensive environmental protection.

Our objectives are to use the naturalresources which form the basis of our exis-tence on this planet sparingly and in amanner which takes the requirements ofboth nature and humanity into consider-ation.

You too can help to protect the environ-ment by operating your vehicle in an envi-ronmentally-responsible manner.

Energy consumption and the rate ofengine, transmission, brake and tyre weardepend on the following factors:

Roperating conditions of your vehicle

Ryour personal driving style

You can influence both factors. Therefore,please bear the following in mind:

Operating conditions:

Robserve the correct tyre pressure.

Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight inthe vehicle

Rremove the roof rack once you no longerneed it.

Ra regularly serviced vehicle will con-tribute to environmental protection. Youshould therefore adhere to the serviceintervals.

Rall maintenance work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe dis-tance from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rmonitor the vehicle's energy consump-tion.

High-voltage battery


Have a defective high-voltage battery dis-posed of in an environmentally-responsi-ble manner. Contact a specialist workshopthat is qualified to work on smart electricdrive vehicles and has the necessary spe-cialist knowledge and tools to carry out thework required. smart recommends that youuse a smart Centre for this purpose.

Returning an end-of-life vehicle

EU countries only:smart will take back your end-of-life vehiclefor environment-friendly disposal inaccordance with the European Union (EU)End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive.This makes an important contribution toclosing the recycling circle and conservingresources. A network of vehicle take-backpoints and dismantlers has been establishedfor you to return your vehicle. Returningvehicles to these facilities is free of charge.For further information about the recyclingand disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and thetake-back conditions, please visit thenational smart website for your country.

smart genuine parts


Daimler AG also supplies reconditionedassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. For these, the samewarranty applies as for new parts.

! Airbags and seat belt tensioners, as wellas control units and sensors for theserestraint systems, may be installed in thefollowing areas of your vehicle:

RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRdashboard

20 >> Introduction.

Rinstrument clusterRcentre consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraint sys-tems.Have accessories retrofitted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only smart genuine parts or parts of the samequality may be used. Additionally, onlytyres, wheels and accessories approved forthe specific type of vehicle may be used.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) when ordering smart genuineparts.Using parts, tyres, wheels or safety-relevantequipment not approved by smart couldendanger the operating safety of the vehicle.Safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake sys-tem, could malfunction.smart tests genuine parts and conversionparts and accessories that have been specif-ically approved for your vehicle for theirreliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, smart is unable toassess other parts. smart therefore acceptsno responsibility for the use of such parts insmart vehicles, even if they have been offi-cially approved or independently approvedby a testing centre.In Germany, certain parts are only officiallyapproved for installation or modification ifthey comply with legal requirements. Thisalso applies to some other countries. All gen-uine smart parts meet the approval require-ments. The use of non-approved parts mayinvalidate the vehicle's general operatingpermit.The following situations will invalidate theoperating permit:

RThe vehicle type changes from that statedin the vehicle's operating permit, due tomodifications.ROther road users are likely to be endan-

gered.REmissions or noise characteristics deteri-

orate.

Warranty for the smart Audio-Systemand smart Media-System

The smart sales organisation provides a war-ranty for a period of 24 months without a kil-ometre limit for the smart Audio-System andthe smart Media-System.The warranty issuer is the respective salesorganisation in the country in which theaccessory or replacement part was pur-chased (see list in the service booklet).

Vehicle equipment

This Owner's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipmentavailable for the vehicle at the time of pub-lication of this Owner's Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please notethat the vehicle equipment may differ fromcertain descriptions and illustrations provi-ded in this manual. This is also the case forsystems and functions relevant to safety.The vehicle's original purchase contractdocumentation contains a list of all the sys-tems in your vehicle. Please contact anysmart centre to help clarify any questionsrelated to the vehicle equipment and opera-tion.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNING

If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or necessary repairscarried out, this could result in malfunc-tions or system failures. There is a risk ofan accident.

Always have the prescribed service/main-tenance work as well as necessary repairscarried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-cation equipment integrated in the vehicle

>> Introduction. 21

Z

when driving, you could be distracted fromthe traffic situation. This could also causeyou to lose control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.

Only operate this equipment when thetraffic situation permits. If you cannot besure of this, stop the vehicle paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions andoperate the equipment with the vehiclestationary.

G WARNING

Modifications to electronic components,their software as well as wiring couldaffect their function and/or the operationof other networked components. This couldin particular also be the case for systemsrelevant to safety. They might not functionproperly anymore and/or jeopardise theoperational safety of the vehicle. There isan increased risk of an accident and injury.

Do not attempt to modify the wiring as wellas electronic components or their software.Always have work on electrical and elec-tronic components carried out at a quali-fied specialist workshop.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systemscan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. The driver is responsible for keepinga safe distance from the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time andfor staying in lane. The driving style shouldalways be adjusted to the current street andweather conditions. An adequate safe dis-tance must be maintained at all times.You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently driv-ing when operating information systems andcommunication devices integrated into thevehicle.If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:

Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highkerb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a

kerb, a speed bump or a pothole in theroadRa heavy object strikes the underbody or

parts of the chassisIn situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tyres couldbe damaged without the damage beingvisible. Components damaged in this waycan unexpectedly fail or, in the case of anaccident, no longer withstand the strainthey are designed to.In such situations, have the vehiclechecked and repaired immediately at aqualified specialist workshop. If on con-tinuing your journey you notice that driv-ing safety is impaired, pull over and stopthe vehicle immediately, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. In suchcases, consult a qualified specialist work-shop.

The multimedia device is equipped withtechnical provisions to protect it againsttheft. Further information is available fromany smart centre.The functionality of a roof aerial (radio, DAB)may be impaired if roof carriers are used.Metallised retrofit film on windows may alsoaffect radio and GPS reception and have anegative impact on all other aerial functionsin the vehicle interior.

Declarations of conformity

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of thevehicle components has been checked andcertified according to the currently validversion of Regulation ECE-R 10.

Declaration of conformity for two-wayradio systems according to Directive2014/53/EU

The components of the vehicle that receiveand/or transmit radio waves are compliantwith the basic requirements and all other

22 >> Introduction.

relevant regulations stipulated by Directive2014/53/EU.You can obtain further information from anyMercedes-Benz Service Centre.In the following, you will find the addressesof radio component manufacturers which,due to their size or nature, do not allow thisinformation to be indicated on the equip-ment.Tyre pressure monitor sensors: SchraderElectronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, BelfastRoad, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern IrelandTransponder ring:Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey,TunisiaRemote keyless entry:Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey,TunisiaAlps Electric Europe GmbH, Ohmstrasse 4,D-85716 Unterschleissheim, GermanyRadio:Visteon Electronics, 04 Rue Nelson Mandela,Zone Industrielle Borj Cedria, 2055 Bir El Bey,TunisiaContinental Automotive, 1 Rue de Clairefon-taine, 78120 Rambouillet, FranceMobile communication and telemetry:Ficosa Internationnal, Gran Via de Carles III98, 08028 Barcelona, SpainRadar:Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229Leonberg, GermanyWindscreen unit:car2go Group GmbH, Fasanenweg 15-17,70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen, Germany

Type of radio device in the vehicle

Frequencyrange

Technology Transmis-sion output/magneticfieldstrength

125 kHz(119 –135 kHz)

Trans-ponder ring

≤ 42 dBμA/mat 10 m

13.553 –13.567 MHz

WindshieldUnit (Vehi-cle accesssystem forCar2Go)

≤ 42 dBμA/mat 10 m

433 MHz(433.05 –434.79 MHz)

Remote key-less entryTyre pres-sure monitor

≤ 10 mWe.r.p.

2.4 GHz ISMwaveband(2400 –2483.5 MHz)

Bluetooth ≤ 100 mWe.i.r.p.

76 - 77 GHz 76 GHz Radar ≤ 55 dBmpeak e.i.r.p.

Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipmentat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.

Only connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, which isapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell mayrestrict the clearance around the pedals orblock a depressed pedal. This jeopardises

>> Introduction. 23

Z

the operating and road safety of the vehi-cle. There is a risk of an accident.

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle sothat they do not get into the driver's foot-well. Always fit the floormats securely andas prescribed in order to ensure that thereis always sufficient room for the pedals. Donot use loose floormats and do not placeseveral floormats on top of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and a deviceis connected to a diagnostic connection,the battery may become discharged.

Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the nec-essary special skills, tools and qualificationsto correctly carry out any necessary work onyour vehicle. This particularly applies towork relevant to safety.Observe the information contained in theService Booklet.Always have the following work carried outon your vehicle at a smart centre:

Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRmodifications, installations and conver-

sionsRwork on electronic componentsRreplacing the 12 V battery within the pre-

scribed interval, at the latest every threeyears

You can obtain current information concern-ing the servicing of your vehicle at any timefrom a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. asmart centre.

Vehicle registration

smart may ask its smart centres to carry outtechnical inspections on certain vehicles.The quality or safety of the vehicle isimproved as a result of the inspection.smart is only able to notify the vehicle ownerabout vehicle inspections if smart has thevehicle registration data.

In the following cases, it is possible that avehicle has not yet been registered in theowner's name:

Rthe vehicle was not purchased at anauthorised specialist dealerRthe vehicle has not yet been examined at a

smart centresmart recommends registering the vehicle ina smart centre.Notify smart as soon as possible if there is achange of address or if ownership of thevehicles changes. This can be done at a smartcentre, for example.

High-voltage electrical system

Danger of electric shock

G DANGER

The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys-tem is under high voltage. If you modifycomponents in the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system or touch damaged com-ponents, you may be electrocuted. Thecomponents in the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system may be damaged in anaccident, although the damage is not visi-ble. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Do not touch any high-voltage componentsafter an accident and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system.Have the vehicle towed away after an acci-dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec-trical system checked by a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

24 >> Introduction.

All of the vehicle's high-voltage electricalsystem components are marked with yellowwarning stickers which warn you of the dan-gers of high voltages. The cables of the vehi-cle's high-voltage electrical system areorange in colour.Observe the following before carrying outgeneral work such as changing a bulb orchecking the coolant level:

Rthe ignition is switched offRthe charging cable for charging the high-

voltage battery is disconnected

Automatically switching off the vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical system

In order to prevent anyone coming into con-tact with high voltage, the high-voltageelectrical system is generally switched offautomatically in the following cases:

Rthe restraint systems are activated in theevent of an accidentRan electrical short circuit is detected in the

vehicle's high-voltage electrical systemRan electrical connection in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical system is discon-nected


G WARNING

In the event of a vehicle fire, the internalpressure of the high-voltage battery couldexceed a critical value. In this case, flam-mable gas escapes through a vent valve inthe vehicle's underbody. The gas canignite. There is a risk of injury.

Leave the danger area immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance,whilst observing legal requirements.

G WARNING

If the housing of the high-voltage batteryhas been damaged, electrolyte and gasesmay leak out. These are poisonous andcaustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-ing. Immediately rinse electrolyte

splashes off with water and seek medicalattention straight away.

Correct use

If warning stickers are removed, you may failto recognise certain dangers. Leave warningstickers in place.The following are important sources of infor-mation in regard to vehicle use:

Rsafety notes in this Owner's ManualRtechnical data in this Owner's ManualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Implied warranty

! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by thesmart implied warranty or by the New orUsed-Vehicle Warranty.

QR codes for rescue card

The QR code is affixed on the charge socketflap and on the door pillar (B-pillar), on theopposite side. In the event of an accident,rescue services can use the QR code toquickly determine the corresponding rescuecard for a vehicle. The current rescue cardcontains the most important informationabout the vehicle in compact form, such asthe routing of the electric cables. Furtherinformation: www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Data stored in the vehicle

Information from electronic controlunits

Your vehicle is equipped with electroniccontrol units. Some of them are necessary foryour vehicle to function safely, some provide

>> Introduction. 25

Z

support when driving (driver assistancesystems). In addition, your vehicle offerscomfort or entertainment functions whichare also made possible with electronic con-trol units.Electronic control units contain data memo-ries which can permanently or temporarilystore technical information on vehicle con-dition, component stress, service require-ments as well as technical incidents andfaults.This information generally documents thecondition of a component, a module, a systemor of the environment such as:

Roperating states of system components(e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tyre pres-sure)Rstatus messages of the vehicle or its indi-

vidual components (e.g. wheel revolu-tions/speed, deceleration in movement,lateral acceleration, display of seat beltsfastened)Rmalfunctions and defects in key system

components (e.g. the lights and brakes)Rinformation on incidents in which the

vehicle is damagedRreactions of the systems in specific driv-

ing situations (e.g. deployment of an air-bag, use of stability control systems)Rambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain

sensor)In addition to the provision of control unitfunctions, this data serves to detect and rec-tify faults as well as to optimise vehiclefunctions by the manufacturer. Most of thisdata is volatile and is only processed in thevehicle itself. Only a small proportion of thedata is stored in event or error memories.When service work is done on your vehicle,the technical data from the vehicle can beread out by service network staff or thirdparties. Service work is, for example, repairwork, maintenance, warranty claims andquality assurance measures. The data is readout using the legally prescribed OBD (Euro-pean On-board Diagnostics) connector in thevehicle. The respective workshop of servicenetwork or third parties collect, process anduse the data. The data documents technicalstates of the vehicle, help in finding errorsand in improving quality and are transferredto the manufacturer if necessary. In addition,the manufacturer is subject to product lia-

bility. For this purpose, the manufacturerrequires technical data from vehicles.Error memories in the vehicle can be reset bya service outlet during repairs or servicework.Depending on the equipment selected, youcan enter data in comfort and infotainmentfunctions of the vehicle.This includes, for example:

Rmultimedia data, such as music, films orphotos for playback in an integrated mul-timedia systemRaddress book data for use in an integrated

hands-free system or an integrated navi-gation systemRnavigation destinations enteredRdata on the use of Internet servicesThis data can be saved locally in the vehicleor it is located on a device which you haveconnected to the vehicle. As long as this datais saved in the vehicle, you can delete it atany time. Transfer of this data to third par-ties only occurs at your request, especiallyas part of online services according to thesettings you have selected.You can save comfort settings/individuali-sation in the vehicle and change them at anytime.Depending on the equipment, these include,for example:

Rsettings for seat and steering wheel posi-tionsRsuspension and air-conditioning settingsRindividualisation such as interior lightingAs long as your vehicle is suitably equipped,you can connect your mobile phone oranother mobile end device with the vehicle.You can operate these devices via the controlelements integrated in the vehicle. Imagesand sound from the mobile phone can playedback via the multimedia system. At the sametime, certain information is transferred toyour mobile phone.This includes, depending on the type of inte-gration, for example:

Rgeneral vehicle statusRposition dataThis allows the use of selected mobile phoneapps, e.g. navigation or music playback.There is no further interaction betweenmobile phone and vehicle; in particular there

26 >> Introduction.

is no active access to vehicle data. The pro-vider of the app being used determines howthe data may be further processed. Whichsettings you can adjust, if any, depends onthe specific app and the operating system ofyour mobile phone.

Service providers

Wireless network connection

In as far as your vehicle has a wireless net-work connection, this will permit theexchange of data between your vehicle andfurther systems. The wireless network con-nection is enabled by a transmission andreception device belonging to the vehicle orvia mobile end devices (e.g. mobile phones)you bring into the vehicle. Online functionscan be used via this wireless network con-nection. These include online services andapplications/apps, which are provided bythe manufacturer or by other providers.

Manufacturer's own services

For online services of the manufacturer, themanufacturer describes the specific func-tions and the associated data protectioninformation in an appropriate place. Per-sonal identification data may be used to pro-vide online services. Data transfer to this endoccurs via a protected connection e. g. usingthe IT systems of the manufacturer providedfor this purpose. The collecting, processing,and use of personal identification databeyond the provision of services occursexclusively on the basis of a legal permit orafter due consent.Generally, you can enable or disable theservices and functions (which sometimeshave associated costs). In some cases, thisalso applies to the whole data connection ofthe vehicle. Excluded from this are speciallegally prescribed functions and services.

Services of third parties

In as far as it is possible to use the onlineservices of other providers, these servicesare subject to the responsibility as well asthe data protection and terms of use of therespective provider. The manufacturer has

no influence on the contents exchangedwhilst using these services.Please ask the respective service provider fordetails on the type, extent and purpose of thecollection and use of personal data in thecontext of third party services.

Copyright information

Information on licenses of Free and Open-Source software used in the vehicle and theelectronic components:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

>> Introduction. 27

Z

Cockpit

Function Page

: Charge level display 64Power display 64

; Instrument cluster 33

= Horn

? Instrument cluster multi-function lever 100Windscreen wipers combi-nation switch 81

A Automatic locking feature 84Hazard warning lamps 164

B Overhead control panel 31

C smart Audio-System 105smart Media-System 113

Function Page

D Climate control systemcontrol panel 89

E Ignition lock 59

F Control panel for:Lane Keeping Assist 67Parking aid 95Acoustic presence indica-tor 62Headlamp range adjust-ment 80

G Lights combination switch 79

28 Cockpit>>

At

a gl

ance

.

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Colour display of theinstrument cluster 99Monochrome display of theinstrument cluster 99

; smart Audio-System 105smart Media-System 113

= Only for instrument cluster with colour display:WX Adjusts the vol-ume 113

Switches voice-oper-ated control on or off andaccepts or ends a call 113

? ® Increases or storesthe current speed 69− Decreases current speed 69

Function Page

A ° Calls up the last speedstored 69

B ± Interrupts cruisecontrol or the limiter 69

C ¯ Activates cruise con-trol 69^ Deactivates cruisecontrol or the limiter 69È Activates limiter 69

D Only for instrument cluster with colour display:9: Scrolls throughmenus 100a Confirms the selec-tion 102

Multifunction steering wheel 29

>> A

t a

glan

ce.

Centre console with drawer

Function Page

: Cup holders 141Ashtray 93

; Drawer 141

= smart fortwo coupé: coinholder

= smart fortwo cabrio: opensand closes the soft top 86

? Selector lever 61

A Parking brake 60

Function Page

B Cigarette lighter 9312 V socket 93

C smart Media-System: AUXport, USB port and SD cardslot 113

D Cup holders 141

E Selector lever indicator 61

F ECO mode 63

30 Centre console with drawer>>

At

a gl

ance

.

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: Left-hand reading lamp 81

; Interior lighting 81

= Right-hand reading lamp 81

Function Page

? PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-tor lamps 39

A Rear-view mirror 57

Overhead control panel 31

>> A

t a

glan

ce.

Door control panel

Function Page

: Opens the door 84

; Adjusts the exterior mir-rors 58

Function Page

= Opens and closes the sidewindows 86

32 Door control panel>>

At

a gl

ance

.

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display

Function Page

: Speedometer

; Display

= Warning and indicatorlamps

C Doors or tailgate 180

7 Seat belts 181

6 Restraint system 181

þ Drive diagnostics 185

J Brakes 183

! ABS 188

÷ ESP® 53

h Tyre pressure monitor 190

D Power steering 193

· Collision warning 193

^ Active Brake Assist 51

Function Page

Ã Lane Keeping Assist 194

# 12 V battery 196

R Rear foglamp 80

O Foglamps 80

K Main-beam headlamps 79

L Dipped-beam headlamps 79

T Side lamps 80

è Charging cable 185

¯ Cruise control 195

È Limiter 195

b Brake lights, rain or lightsensors 196

¯

°

Next service due date

184

õ READY indicator 196

Displays shown in the instrument cluster and the display 33

>> A

t a

glan

ce.

Occupant safety

Restraint system

Protection provided by the restraint sys-tem

The restraint system comprises:

RSeat belt systemRAirbagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemIn the event of an accident, the restraint sys-tem can:

Rreduce the risk of vehicle occupants com-ing into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior.Rreduce the forces to which vehicle occu-

pants are subjectedOnly a seat belt which is worn correctly canprovide the intended level of protection. Thebelt tensioners and/or airbags can comple-ment a correctly worn seat belt depending onthe detected accident situation. Belt ten-sioners and airbags are not necessarilydeployed in every accident.For the restraint system to provide its fullprotection, each occupant has to:

Rhave the seat belt fastened correctlyRbe in an almost upright position with their

back against the seat backrestRsit with their feet resting on the floor, if

possibleRif below 1.50 m in height, be secured using

an additional restraint system suitable foryour vehicle

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalitiesin every accident situation. In particular,seat belts and airbags generally do not pro-tect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside. The risk of an injury result-ing from airbag deployment cannot be ruledout entirely either.

Limited protection from restraint system

G WARNING

If the restraint system is modified, it mayno longer work as intended. The restraintsystem may then not perform its intended

protective function by failing in an acci-dent or triggering unexpectedly, for exam-ple. There is an increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.

Never modify parts of the restraint system.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as wellas electronic components or their software.

If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle toaccommodate a person with disabilities,contact a qualified specialist workshop.smart recommends that you use driving aidswhich have been approved specifically foryour vehicle by smart.

Preparing the restraint system for oper-ation

When the ignition is switched on, the 6restraint system warning lamp lights upduring the self-check. It goes out no laterthan a few seconds after the vehicle is star-ted. The components of the restraint systemare then ready for operation.

Restraint system malfunctions

RThe restraint system warning lamp 6does not light up when the ignition isswitched on.RThe restraint system warning lamp 6 is

constantly lit or lights up repeatedly whendriving.

In the event of an accident, the vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical system may not bedeactivated as intended if there is a mal-function in the restraint system.

G DANGER

If the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-gered unintentionally or may not deployas intended during an accident. This mayaffect the seat belt tensioner or airbag, forexample. Furthermore, in the event of anaccident, the vehicle's high-voltage elec-trical system may not be deactivated asintended. You may be electrocuted if youtouch the damaged components of thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system.

34 Occupant safety>>

Saf

ety

.

This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked andrepaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. After an accident, switchoff the ignition immediately and removethe key from the ignition lock.

Restraint system response during anaccident

How the restraint system works depends onthe severity of the impact detected and theapparent type of accident:

Rfrontal collisionRrear collisionRside impactRoverturn1

The activation threshold for the restraintsystem components is determined based onthe analysis of the sensor values measured atvarious points in the vehicle. This process ispre-emptive in nature. The triggering proc-ess of the restraint system componentsshould take place in good time at the start ofthe collision.Factors which can only be seen and meas-ured after a collision has occurred do notplay a decisive role in the deployment of anairbag, nor do they provide an indication ofairbag deployment.The vehicle may be deformed significantlywithout an airbag being deployed. This is thecase if only parts which are relatively easilydeformed are affected and the rate of vehicledeceleration is not high. Conversely, an air-bag may be deployed even though the vehiclesuffers only minor deformation. If, forinstance, very rigid car parts such as longi-tudinal body members are hit, the rate ofvehicle deceleration may be sufficient.

The restraint system components can beactivated or triggered independently of eachother:

components detected trigger sit-uation

belt tensioners frontal collision,rear collision, sideimpact, overturn1

driver's airbag,front-passengerfront airbag andkneebag

frontal collision

sidebag side impact

windowbag2 orheadbag3

side impact, over-turn1, frontal colli-sion

G WARNING

After the airbag deploys, the airbag partsare hot. There is a risk of injury.

Do not touch the airbag parts. Have adeployed airbag replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.

i smart recommends that you have thevehicle towed to a qualified specialistworkshop after an accident. Take this intoaccount, particularly if a belt tensionerwas triggered or an airbag was deployed.

If the belt tensioners are triggered or an air-bag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and asmall amount of powder may also bereleased:

Rthe bang will not usually affect your hear-ing.Rin general, the powder released is not haz-

ardous to health but may cause short-termbreathing difficulties to persons sufferingfrom asthma or other pulmonary condi-tions.provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehi-cle immediately or open the window inorder to prevent breathing difficulties.

1 Only for certain countries.2 smart fortwo coupé3 smart fortwo cabrio

Occupant safety 35

>> S

afet

y.

Z

Seat belts

Protection provided by seat belts

Always fasten seat belts correctly beforecommencing your journey. A seat belt canonly provide maximum protection when worncorrectly.

G WARNING

If the seat belt is worn incorrectly, it can-not perform its intended protective func-tion. Furthermore, an incorrectly worn seatbelt can cause additional injuries, e.g. inthe event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupantshave their seat belts fastened correctlyand are sitting properly.

Always observe the notes on correct driver'sseat position (Y page 54) and seat adjust-ment (Y page 55).Every car occupant must observe the follow-ing notes to ensure a properly worn seat beltcan provide full protection.RThe seat belt must:

- not be twisted and must be tight and fitsnugly across your body

- be routed across the centre of the shoul-der and as low down across your hips aspossible

Rthe shoulder section of the belt should nottouch your neck nor be routed under yourarm or behind your back.Ravoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter

coat.Rpress the lap belt down into your hip joints

and pull taut by the shoulder section of thebelt. The lap belt must never be routedacross your stomach or abdomen.Rnever route the seat belt across sharp,

pointed, abrasive or fragile objects.Ronly one person per seat belt. Infants and

children must never travel sitting on thelap of a vehicle occupant.Rnever secure objects with a seat belt if the

seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants. Always observe the

notes on "Loading the vehicle" for securingobjects, luggage or loads (Y page 142).Also make sure that objects are neverplaced between an occupant and the seat,e.g. a cushion.

If children are travelling in the vehicle, besure to observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 40).

Limited protection from seat belts

G WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intendedlevel of protection if you have not movedthe backrest to an almost vertical position.When braking or in the event of an acci-dent, you could slide underneath the seatbelt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries,for example. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that thebackrest is in an almost vertical positionand that the shoulder section of your seat-belt is routed across the centre of yourshoulder.

G WARNING

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear theseat belts correctly without an additionalsuitable restraint system. If the seat belt isworn incorrectly, it cannot perform itsintended protective function. Further-more, an incorrectly worn seat belt cancause additional injuries, e.g. in the eventof an accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Always secure persons less than 1.50 m tallin additional suitable restraint systems.


Saf

ety

.

G WARNING

Seat belts cannot protect as intended, if:

Rthey are damaged, have been modified,are extremely dirty, bleached or dyed

Rthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirty

Rmodifications have been made to the belttensioners, belt anchorages or inertiareels

Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam-age in an accident, e.g. due to glass splint-ers. Modified or damaged seat belts cantear or fail, for example in the event of anaccident. Modified seat belt tensionersmay be deployed unintentionally or notfunction as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.

Never modify seat belts, seat belt tension-ers, seat belt anchorages and inertia reels.Ensure that seat belts are not damaged orworn and are clean. After an accident, havethe seat belts checked immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

smart recommends that you only use seatbelts that have been approved specificallyfor your vehicle by smart.

G WARNING

Pyrotechnical belt tensioners which havebeen triggered are no longer operationaland therefore cannot protect as intended.There is an increased risk of injury, pos-sibly even fatal.

Have pyrotechnic belt tensioners whichhave been triggered replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.

smart recommends that you have the vehicletowed to a qualified specialist workshopafter an accident.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt. Dam-aged seat belts can no longer fulfil their

protective function and must be replaced.Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt

If the seat belt is pulled out quickly orsharply, the inertia reel locks. The belt strapcannot be pulled out any further.

! If the co-driver's seat is not occupied, donot engage the seat belt tongue in thebuckle on the co-driver's seat. Otherwise,in the event of an accident the belt ten-sioner could be triggered in addition toother systems and would need to bereplaced.

For easy fastening, the seat belt is routedthrough the seat belt guide on the side of thedriver's seat.

: Buckle; Belt tongue

X To fasten: always engage seat belttongue ; into buckle : of the corre-sponding seat.

X To release: press the release button in beltbuckle : and guide the seat belt back bybelt tongue ;.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassenger

The 7 seat belt warning lamp in theinstrument cluster reminds you that allvehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts correctly.A warning tone may also sound.As soon as the driver and co-driver fastentheir seat belts, the seat belt warning goesout.

Occupant safety 37

>> S

afet

y.

Z

i If you use an ISOFIX or i-Size childrestraint system on the co-driver's seatwhere the child is not secured using theseat belt from the co-driver's seat, the seatbelt warning can be activated. In this caseyou can insert the seat belt tongue of theseat belt into the belt buckle belonging tothe co-driver's seat. When doing so, routethe seat belt between the ISOFIX or i-Sizechild restraint system and the backrest ofthe co-driver's seat.

Airbags

Overview of airbags

The installation location of an airbag isidentified by the AIRBAG symbol.A deployed airbag can increase the level ofprotection provided to the vehicle occupant.

AIRBAG Possible protectionfor:

: Headbag4 Head

; Driver'skneebag

Thigh, knee and lowerleg

= Driver's air-bag

Head and thorax

? Front-passengerfront airbag

Head and thorax

A Windowbag5 Head

B Sidebag Thorax and pelvis

The front-passenger front airbag can only bedeployed in an accident if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamp is lit. If the front-passenger seat is occupied, make sure thatthe status of the front-passenger front air-bag is correct both before and during thejourney (Y page 39).

Protection provided by the airbags

Depending on the accident situation, an air-bag supplements a correctly worn seat beltand can increase protection.

G WARNING

If you deviate from the correct seat posi-tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten-ded protective function and can even causeadditional injuries when deployed. Thereis an increased risk of serious or even fatalinjuries.

In order to avoid such risks, always ensurethat all vehicle occupants:

Rfasten their seatbelts correctly, includ-ing pregnant women

Rare seated correctly and maintain thefurthest possible distance from the air-bags

Robserve the following notes

Always ensure that there are no objectslocated between the airbag and the vehicleoccupant.

To avoid risks resulting from a deployed air-bag:

Radjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Move the driver's and co-driver's seats as far back as possibleAlways observe the information on thecorrect driver's seat position (Y page 54).Rhold the steering wheel by the rim only.

This allows the airbag to deploy fullyRalways lean against the backrest while

driving. Do not lean forwards or againstthe door or side window. Otherwise, you arein the airbags' deployment area

4 smart fortwo cabrio5 smart fortwo coupé


Saf

ety

.

Rfeet should always be placed on theground. Do not place your feet on the dash-board, for example. Otherwise, your feetare in the airbag's deployment areaRwhen travelling with children in the vehi-

cle, observe the additional notes(Y page 40)Ralways stow objects correctly and securelyObjects in the vehicle interior may preventthe airbag from functioning correctly.Therefore, always make sure that:

Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and theairbagRthere are no objects between the seat, door

and B-pillarRthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hang-

ers, hanging on the grab handles or coathooksRthere are no accessories, such as drinks

can holders, attached in the airbag'sdeployment area, e.g. on doors, side win-dows or side trim panelsRthere are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile

objects in the pockets of your clothing.Stow such objects in a suitable place

Limited protection from airbags

G WARNING

If you modify an airbag cover or affixobjects such as stickers to it, the airbagcan no longer function correctly. There isan increased risk of injury.

Never modify an airbag cover or affixobjects to it.

G WARNING

Unsuitable seat covers may obstruct oreven prevent deployment of the airbagsintegrated into the seats. The airbags maythen fail to protect the vehicle occupantsas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury, possibly even fatal.

Use only seat covers which have been spe-cifically approved for the respective seatby smart.

G WARNING

Sensors to control the airbags are locatedin the doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door pan-elling, as well as damaged doors, can leadto the function of the sensors beingimpaired. The airbags might therefore notfunction properly any more. Consequently,the airbags cannot protect vehicle occu-pants as they are designed to do. Thisposes an increased risk of injury.

Never modify the doors or parts of thedoors. Always have work on the doors ordoor panelling carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNING

An airbag that has been deployed oncecannot provide any further protection and,in the event of an accident, can no longerperform its intended protective function.There is an increased risk of injury.

Have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe-cialist workshop to have the deployed air-bag replaced.

Have deployed airbags replaced immedi-ately.

Status of the front-passenger front air-bag

PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lampsThe front-passenger front airbag can beenabled or disabled using the airbag-offswitch in the instrument panel on the front-passenger side (Y page 44).

Occupant safety 39

>> S

afet

y.

Z

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamps are part of thefront-passenger front airbag deactivationsystem.The indicator lamps display the status of thefront-passenger front airbag.

RPASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up: thefront-passenger front airbag is disabled.It will then not be deployed in the event ofan accident.RPASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up: the

front-passenger front airbag is enabled.The front-passenger front airbag maydeploy during an accident.

If the front-passenger seat is occupied, makesure that the status of the front-passengerfront airbag is correct depending on the sit-uation both before and during the journey.

RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front airbagmust be enabled or disabled depends onthe installed child restraint system andthe age and size of the child. Make surethat you observe the notes on "Children inthe vehicle" (Y page 40). There, you willalso find information on rearward- orforward-facing child restraint systems onthe front-passenger seat.RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAG

ON indicator lamp must be lit. The front-passenger front airbag is enabled. Makesure that you read the notes on "Seat belts"(Y page 36) and "Airbags" (Y page 38).There, you can also find information on thecorrect seat position.

Observe the information on the airbag deac-tivation system of the front-passenger frontairbag (Y page 44).

Children in the vehicle

Travelling safely with children onboard

G WARNING

If you leave children unattended in thevehicle, they may be able to set the vehiclein motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake

Rshift the automatic transmission out ofpark position P

Rstart the engine

In addition, they may operate vehicleequipment and become trapped. There is arisk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take thekey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

G WARNING

If persons (particularly children) areexposed to heat or cold for a prolongedperiod, there is a risk of serious or evenfatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-ticularly children) unattended in the vehi-cle.

G WARNING

If the child restraint system is placed indirect sunlight, the parts could becomevery hot. Children could be suffer burns bytouching these parts, in particular on themetallic parts of the child restraint sys-tem. There is a risk of injury.

If you and your child leave the vehicle,always make sure that the child restraintsystem is not in direct sunlight. Cover itwith a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed todirect sunlight, leave it to cool down beforesecuring the child in it. Never leave chil-dren unattended in the vehicle.

40 Children in the vehicle>>

Saf

ety

.

To provide better protection to childrenyounger than twelve years old and under1.50 m tall, smart recommends alwaysobserving the following:

RSecure children only in a child restraintsystem that is appropriate for the age,weight and size of the child and that isrecommended and suitable for use in smartvehicles. Make sure you observe theinstructions for correct use of the childrestraint system.ROnly use the following securing systems

with the child restraint systems:- the seat belt system- the ISOFIX or i‑Size securing rings- the Top Tether anchoragesRThe manufacturer's child restraint system

installation instructions.RThe warning labels in the vehicle interior

and on the child restraint system.

G WARNING

If the child restraint system is incorrectlyfitted on the seat position suitable for thispurpose, it cannot perform its intendedprotective function. In the event of anaccident, sharp braking or a suddenchange in direction, the child may not beheld securely. There is an increased risk ofserious or even fatal injuries.

Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the correct use for thechild restraint system. Make sure that theentire surface of the child restraint systemis resting on the seat surface. Never placeobjects under or behind the child restraintsystem, e.g. cushions. Only use childrestraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNING

If the child restraint system is fitted incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking ora sudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about,striking vehicle occupants. There is an

increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.

Always fit child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions.

G WARNING

Child restraint systems or their securingsystems that have been damaged or sub-jected to a load in an accident cannot per-form their intended protective function. Inthe event of an accident, sharp braking or asudden change in direction, the child maynot be held securely. There is an increasedrisk of serious or even fatal injuries.

Immediately replace child restraint sys-tems that have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident. Have the childrestraint securing systems checked in aqualified specialist workshop before fit-ting a child restraint system again.

i Use the care products approved by smartto clean the child restraint systems rec-ommended by smart. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Also, always observe the detailed informa-tion below:

RWhen fitting a child restraint system onthe front-passenger seat, observe thenotes on child restraint systems on thefront-passenger seat (Y page 45).RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint

systems (Y page 47).RNotes on recommended child restraint

systems (Y page 49).RInstructions and safety notes on disabling

and enabling the front-passenger frontairbag (Y page 44).RNotes on seat belts (Y page 36).

Children in the vehicle 41

>> S

afet

y.

Z

ISOFIX and i‑Size child seat securingsystems

Notes on ISOFIX and i-Size child seatsecuring systems

G WARNING

For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-tems, where the child is secured using theintegrated seat belt of the child restraintsystem, the permissible gross weight ofthe child and the child restraint system is33 kg.

If the child together with the childrestraint system weighs more than 33 kg,ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systemswith integrated seat belt no longer offersufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size childseat securing systems may be overloadedand will not be able to restrain the child,for example, in the event of an accident.This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

If the child together with the childrestraint system weighs more than 33 kg ,only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraintsystems with which the child is securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

RAlways observe the specifications for theweight of the child restraint system:- in the installation and operating

instructions of the manufacturer of thechild restraint system which is used

- on a label on the child restraint system,if available

Check regularly that the maximum per-missible gross weight of child and childrestraint system is still being maintained.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sureto observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the instructions for correctuse of the child restraint system.ISOFIX and i‑Size are standardised securingsystems for special restraint systems. ISOFIXchild restraint systems are approved inaccordance with ECE R44, i‑Size child

restraint systems are approved in accord-ance with ECE R129.Only child restraint systems that complywith the ECE R44 standard may be attached tothe ISOFIX securing rings. ISOFIX childrestraint systems approved in accordancewith ECE R44 and i-Size child restraint sys-tems approved in accordance with ECE R129can be attached to i-Size securing rings.ISOFIX child restraint systems approved inaccordance with ECE R44 and i-Size childrestraint systems approved in accordancewith ECE R129 can be attached to i-Sizesecuring rings.If you are using an ISOFIX or an i-Size childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand the child is not secured using the seatbelt of the front-passenger seat, the beltwarning may be activated (Y page 37).

To deactivate the belt warning for the front-passenger, proceed as follows:

X Insert the seat belt tongue into the bucklebefore the child restraint system is fittedto the front-passenger seat.

X Then fit the ISOFIX child restraint systemto the front-passenger seat (with seat beltfastened).Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome damaged.

Symbol for attaching an ISOFIX child restraintsystem


Saf

ety

.

Symbol for attaching an i-Size child restraintsystem

Attaching ISOFIX and i‑Size child seatsecuring systems

G WARNING

For ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint sys-tems, where the child is secured using theintegrated seat belt of the child restraintsystem, the permissible gross weight ofthe child and the child restraint system is33 kg.

If the child together with the childrestraint system weighs more than 33 kg,ISOFIX or i‑Size child restraint systemswith integrated seat belt no longer offersufficient protection. ISOFIX or i‑Size childseat securing systems may be overloadedand will not be able to restrain the child,for example, in the event of an accident.This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

If the child together with the childrestraint system weighs more than 33 kg ,only use ISOFIX or i-Size child restraintsystems with which the child is securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

RAlways observe the specifications for theweight of the child restraint system:- in the installation and operating

instructions of the manufacturer of thechild restraint system which is used

- on a label on the child restraint system,if available

Check regularly that the maximum per-missible gross weight of child and childrestraint system is still being maintained.

When fitting a child restraint system, be sureto observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions and the instructions for correctuse of the child restraint system.Before driving the vehicle, make sure that theISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system isengaged correctly in both ISOFIX or i-Sizesecuring rings.

X Install the ISOFIX child restraint systemon both ISOFIX securing rings : or i-Sizesecuring rings ;.

orX Install the i-Size or ISOFIX child restraint

system on both i-Size securing rings ;.

Securing Top Tether

Top Tether can reduce the risk of injury,since it provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system securedwith ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.The child restraint system must be equippedwith a Top Tether belt.


>> S

afet

y.

Z

Top Tether anchorage ; is fitted to the lug-gage compartment floor.

X Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint sys-tem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt ? back over thehead restraint, keeping it as central aspossible, into the luggage compartmentthrough loop :.

X Hook Top Tether hook = of Top Tetherbelt ? into Top Tether anchorage ;.Lift up the carpet a little if necessary.Ensure that:

RTop Tether hook = is hooked into TopTether anchorage ; as shown.RTop Tether belt ? is not twisted.

X Tension Top Tether belt ?. Always complywith the child restraint system manufac-turer's installation instructions whendoing so.

Disabling/enabling the front-passenger front airbag

G WARNING

If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air-bag is disabled. It will not be deployed inthe event of an accident and cannot per-form its intended protective function. Aperson in the front-passenger seat couldthen, for example, come into contact withthe vehicle's interior, especially if the per-son is sitting too close to the dashboard.This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

In this case the front-passenger seat maynot be used. You may only transport a childon the front-passenger seat if they areseated in a suitable rearward or forward-facing child restraint system. Alwaysobserve the information about suitablepositioning of the child restraint system inthis Owner's Manual as well as the childrestraint system manufacturer's installa-tion instructions.

G WARNING

If you secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag can deploy in theevent of an accident. The child could bestruck by the airbag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.

Make sure that the front-passenger frontairbag has been disabled. The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing childrestraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVEAIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUSINJURY to the child can occur.

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampremains off and/or the PASSENGER AIR BAGON indicator lamp is lit, do not fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front-


Saf

ety

.

passenger seat. For more information, see"Problems with automatic front-passengerairbag deactivation" (Y page 181).

G WARNING

If you secure a child in a forward-facingchild restraint system on the front-passenger seat and you position the front-passenger seat too close to the dashboard,in the event of an accident, the child could:

Rcome into contact with the vehicle'sinterior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is lit, for example

Rbe struck by the airbag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG ON indicator lamp is on.

This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.

Move the front-passenger seat as far backas possible. Always make sure that theshoulder belt strap is correctly routed fromthe vehicle belt outlet to the shoulder beltguide on the child restraint system. Theshoulder belt strap must be routed for-wards and downwards from the vehiclebelt outlet. If necessary, adjust the front-passenger seat accordingly. Additionally,always observe the information on suita-ble positioning of the child restraint sys-tem in this Owner's Manual in addition tothe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraintsystem

If you use a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat, you

must disable the front-passenger front air-bag.

Airbag-off switch : for manually enablingand disabling the front-passenger front air-bag is in the dashboard on the front-passenger side.

X Push in front-passenger airbag-offswitch : beyond the point of resistance.

X To disable the front-passenger front air-bag: turn airbag-off switch : anti-clock-wise.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indica-tor lamp on the overhead control panellights up and stays on when the ignition isswitched on (Y page 39).

X To enable the front-passenger front air-bag: turn airbag-off switch : clockwise.The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON × indicatorlamp on the overhead control panel lightsup and stays on when the ignition isswitched on (Y page 39).

The front-passenger airbag is enabled whenthe ignition is switched on unless the front-passenger front airbag has been manuallydisabled. If the front-passenger front airbagis disabled and the ignition is switched on,the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 4 indicatorlamp in the overhead control panel(Y page 39) lights up permanently.

Child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat

Notes on child restraint systems

If you secure a child in a child restraint sys-tem on the front-passenger seat, alwaysobserve the information on "Disabling thefront-passenger front airbag" (Y page 44).


>> S

afet

y.

Z

You avoid risks when you:

Renable or disable the front-passengerfront airbag correctly.Rposition the child restraint system favour-

ably.

A warning notice is located on the front-passenger sun visor.

G WARNING

If you secure a child in a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat andthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampis off, the front-passenger front airbag candeploy in the event of an accident. Thechild could be struck by the airbag. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.

Make sure that the front-passenger frontairbag has been disabled. The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

NEVER use a rearward-facing childrestraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVEAIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUSINJURY to the child can occur.

Always observe the notes on transportingchildren safely (Y page 40).

Notes on rearward and forward facingchild restraint systems

Symbol for a rearward-facing child restraintsystem

If you secure a child in a rearward-facingchild restraint system on the co-driver'sseat, you must always make sure that thefront-passenger front airbag is deactivated.This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously(Y page 39).When using a child restraint system on theco-driver's seat you must observe the fol-lowing:

Rmove the co-driver's seat as far back aspossible.Rthe surface of the child restraint system

must lie fully on the co-driver's seat cush-ion.Rthe backrest of a forward-facing child

restraint system must, as far as possible,rest on the backrest of the co-driver's seat.The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by thehead restraint.Radjust the angle of the backrest appropri-

ately.Rif necessary, remove the head restraint on

the front-passenger seat.Ralways make sure that the shoulder belt

strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guideon the child restraint system. The shoulderbelt strap must be routed forwards anddownwards from the belt sash guide.Rnever place objects under or behind the

child restraint system, e.g. cushions.


Saf

ety

.

Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation and operating instructions forthe child restraint system used.

Suitability of the seats for childrestraint systems

Notes on attaching suitable childrestraint systems

Only child restraint systems that meet thefollowing ECE standards are permitted foruse in the vehicle:

RECE R44RECE R129 (i‑Size child restraint systems)Only suitable for use in the vehicles speci-fied which are equipped with three-pointseat belts approved in accordance with ECERegulation No.16 or similar standards.

Label for an ECE R44 compliant child restraintsystem

Label for an ECE R129 compliant child restraintsystem

ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems inthe following "Universal" category may beused on seats marked U, UF, IUF or i-U inaccordance with the tables on the suitabilityof the seats for attaching child restraint sys-tems.Semi-universal child restraint systems areindicated by the text "Semi-universal" on theapproval label. Use is only permitted if thevehicle and the seat are listed in the childrestraint system manufacturer's vehiclemodel list.

Suitability of the seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Observe the following notes:

Rfor certain child restraint systems of weight category II or III there may be limitations forthe maximum size setting, e.g. due to possible contact with the roof.Rthe child restraint system must not touch the roof or be subjected to a load by the head

restraint.Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system.Legend for the table:RX: not suitable for children of this weight category.RU: suitable for child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that are approved for use

in this weight category.


>> S

afet

y.

Z

RUF: suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems in the "Universal" category that areapproved for use in this weight category.RL: suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in the "Over-

view of recommended child restraint systems" (Y page 49) or if the vehicle and the seat arelisted in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight categories Front-passenger front air-bag is enabled

Front-passenger front air-bag deactivated6

Group 0: up to 10 kg X U, L

Group 0+: up to 13 kg X U, L

Group I: 9 to 18 kg UF, L U, L

Group II: 15 to 25 kg UF, L U, L

Group III: 22 to 36 kg U, L U, L

Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems



restraint.Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system.Legend for the table:RX: not suitable for an ISOFIX child restraint system in this weight category.RIUF: suitable for a forward-facing ISOFIX child restraint system in the "Universal" category

in this weight category.RIL: suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in the table in the "Overview of recommended

child restraint systems" (Y page 49) or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the childrestraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Weight category Size cate-gories

Equipment Front-passenger

front airbag isenabled

Front-passenger

front airbagdeactiva-

ted7

Carry cot F ISO/L1 X X

G ISO/L2 X X

0 up to 10 kgup to approximately6 months

E ISO/R1 X IL

0+ up to 13 kgup to approximately15 months

E ISO/R1 X IL

D ISO/R2 X IL

6 The vehicle is fitted with automatic front-passenger front airbag deactivation. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.



Saf

ety

.

Weight category Size cate-gories

Equipment Front-passenger

front airbag isenabled

Front-passenger

front airbagdeactiva-

ted7

C ISO/R3 X IL

I 9 kg to 18 kgbetween approximately9 months and 4 years

D ISO/R2 X IL

C ISO/R3 X IL

B ISO/F2 IUF IUF

B1 ISO/F2X IUF IUF

A ISO/F3 IUF IUF

Suitability of the seats for attaching i‑Size child restraint systems



restraint.Robserve the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system.Legend for the table:RX: not suitable for an i‑Size child restraint system in this weight category.Ri‑U: suitable for a forward or rearward-facing i‑Size child restraint system of the "Uni-

versal" category.Ri‑UF: suitable for a forward-facing i-Size child restraint system of the "Universal" cate-

gory".

Front-passenger front airbag isenabled

Front-passenger frontairbag IS deactivated8

i‑Size child restraint system i‑UF i‑U

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

The smart fortwo is equipped with a manual front-passenger front airbag deactivation sys-tem.

X Before using a rearward-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat, disable thefront-passenger airbag (Y page 44).




>> S

afet

y.

Z

Recommended child restraint systems for attaching with the vehicle seat belt

Weight categories Manufacturer Type Approval number (E1 ...)

Order number(A 000 ...)9

Category 0:up to 10 kgup to approximately6 months

Britax Römer BABY SAFEplus II

04 301146 970 36 00970 57 00

Category 0+:up to 13 kgup to approximately15 months

Britax Römer BABY SAFEplus II

04 301146 970 36 00970 57 00

Category I:9 kg up to 18 kgbetween approx-imately 9 monthsand 4 years

Britax Römer DUO PLUS 04 301133 970 37 00970 58 00

Category II/III:15 kg up to 36 kgfrom approximately4 years to 12 years

Britax Römer KIDFIX 04 301198 970 38 00970 59 00

Britax Römer KIDFIX XP 04 301304 970 61 00

Recommended ISOFIX child restraint systems for the "Universal"/"Semi-Universal" category

Weight cate-gories

Size cat-egory

Manufacturer Type Approval number(E1 ...)

Order number9

Category 0+:up to 13 kg

E Britax Römer BABY SAFEplus

04 301146 B6 6 86 8224

Category I:9 kg up to18 kg

B1 Britax Römer DUO PLUS 04 301133 A 000 970 37 00A 000 970 58 00

i You can obtain further information about the correct child restraint system from asmart centre.

Further related subjects:

RNotes on child restraint systems on the front-passenger seat (Y page 45).RNotes on attaching suitable child restraint systems (Y page 47).

9 Colour code 9H95


Saf

ety

.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNING

If you leave animals unsupervised orunsecured in the vehicle, they may pressbuttons or switches, for instance.

In this way, animals may:

Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example

Rswitch systems on or off and therebyendanger other road users

Furthermore, unsecured animals may beflung around inside the vehicle in theevent of an accident or abrupt steering orbraking manoeuvre, and thereby injurevehicle occupants. There is a risk of acci-dent and injury.

Never leave animals unattended in thevehicle.

Always secure animals properly whendriving, for instance with a suitable petcarrier.

Driving safely

Driving safety system limitations

! Make sure you have suitable tyres, sothat assistance systems and drivingsafety systems can work as effectively aspossible.

If you fail to adapt your driving style or if youare inattentive, the driving safety systemscan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. Driving safetysystems are merely aids designed to assistdriving. You are responsible for the distanceto the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed andfor braking in good time. Always adapt yourdriving style to suit the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions and maintaina safe distance from the vehicle in front.Drive carefully.For safety reasons, smart recommends thatyou only use snow chains that have beenspecially approved for your vehicle by smart.Further information can be obtained at a

smart centre or a qualified specialist work-shop.

Braking with ABS (Anti-lock BrakingSystem)

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.When you switch on the ignition, the !warning lamp in the instrument clusterlights up. It goes out after the engine is star-ted.ABS works from a speed of about 6 km/h,regardless of road-surface conditions. ABSintervenes in the case of slippery road sur-faces, even when you only brake gently.

X To brake while ABS intervenes: continue todepress the brake pedal with force untilthe braking situation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

G WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety sys-tems are deactivated. There is an increaseddanger of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Using Active Brake Assist

Useful information

With the help of the radar sensor system,Active Brake Assist can calculate the dis-tance of your vehicle to the vehicle travellingin front.If for several seconds, the distance to thevehicle ahead is insufficient for the speedyou are driving at, Active Brake Assist alertsthe driver visually.If a risk of collision is detected, Active BrakeAssist alerts the driver both visually andacoustically. In addition, Active Brake Assist

Driving safely 51

>> S

afet

y.

Z

prepares the vehicle for a possible emer-gency braking manoeuvre.In particularly critical situations ActiveBrake Assist may brake autonomously. Inthis case, Active Brake Assist continues toalert the driver both visually and acousti-cally.

Please note

G WARNING

Active Brake Assist cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex traffic situa-tions.

In these cases, Active Brake Assist may:

Rwarn or brake for no reason

Rnot issue a warning

Rnot brake

There is a risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and do not rely on Active BrakeAssist alone. Be prepared to brake ormanoeuvre if necessary.

G WARNING

Active Brake Assist does not react:

Rto persons, bicycles, motorcycles or ani-mals

Rto approaching vehicles

Rto cross traffic

Ron bends

As a result, Active Brake Assist cannotintervene in all critical situations. There isa risk of an accident.

Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be prepared to brake.

G WARNING

Severe jolting, for example in the case of acollision, may cause the radar sensors tobe misaligned. The function of Active BrakeAssist is then impaired.


Deactivate Active Brake Assist. Have ActiveBrake Assist checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

The following requirements must also be ful-filled:

Rthe selector lever is in position 7.Rthe parking brake is released.Rthe driving speed is within the suitable

speed range.Detection can be restricted under the follow-ing conditions:

Rthe vehicle is new or service work has beencarried out on the system. In this case,observe the information on running-in thevehicleRthe radio sensors are dirty or covered

(Y page 160)Rin heavy rain or snowRthere is interference from other radar

sources, e.g. in multi-storey car parksRthe vehicle travelling in front is narrow,

e.g. a motorcycleRthe vehicle travelling in front is travelling

on a different lineAutonomous braking can be cancelled bybriefly depressing the accelerator pedal.If the brake lamps are inoperative, deacti-vate Active Brake Assist.

i Observe the notes on "Limitations of thedriving safety systems" (Y page 51).

Distance warning and forward collisionwarning with autonomous braking func-tion

Method of operationIf the distance maintained to the vehicleahead is insufficient for the speed you aredriving at, the · warning lamp lights up.If Active Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-sion while driving, the · warning lamplights up and a warning tone sounds. If thedriver depresses the brake pedal fast, thebraking pressure may be increased to a fullbrake application.The autonomous braking function may inter-vene if the driver does not react to theforward collision warning.

52 Driving safely>>

Saf

ety

.

When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h,the forward collision warning may issue awarning in the following situations:

Situation Speed you are trav-elling

Vehicles travellingahead

30 - 140 km/h

Vehicles coming to astandstill

30 - 140 km/h

Stationary vehicles 30 - 80 km/h

Other objects orcrossing vehicles

No warning possible

When driving at speeds of more than 30 km/h,the autonomous braking function may inter-vene in the following situations:

Situation Speed you are trav-elling

Vehicles travellingahead

30 - 140 km/h

Vehicles coming to astandstill

30 - 140 km/h

Stationary vehicles No interventionpossible

Other objects orcrossing vehicles

No interventionpossible

Activating/deactivating Active BrakeAssist

Active Brake Assist is automatically activa-ted when you start the engine.Monochrome display: activating/deactivat-ing Active Brake Assist using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 102).Colour display: activating/deactivatingActive Brake Assist using the on-board com-puter (Y page 103).

Driving with ESP®

If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilise thevehicle.

ESP® supports the driver when pulling awayon wet or slippery roads. ESP® can also sta-bilise the vehicle during braking. ESP® com-prises ETS (Electronic Traction System) andCrosswind Assist.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side.Strong crosswind gusts can impair the road-holding of your vehicle when drivingstraight ahead.Crosswind Assist reduces these impairments.Crosswind assist is active at vehicle speedsabove 70 km/h when driving straight aheador cornering gently.

If ESP® intervenes, pull away carefully andadapt your driving style to the prevailingroad and weather conditions.If the ÷ warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is active. If ESP®

intervenes, the ÷ warning lamp flashes inthe instrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilise the vehicle. In addition, otherdriving safety systems are switched off.This increases the risk of skidding and anaccident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Information on EBD (Electronic Brake-force Distribution)

EBD monitors and controls the brake pres-sure on the rear wheels to improve drivingstability while braking.

G WARNING

If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheelscan lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an acci-dent.

You should therefore adapt your drivingstyle to the different handling character-istics. Have the brake system checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

Driving safely 53

>> S

afet

y.

Z

Understanding functions of the key

: % Unlocks the vehicle;º smart fortwo coupé: Opens the

upper tailgate (press and hold);º smart fortwo cabrio: Opens the soft

top (press and hold)= & Locks the vehicle

: % Unlocks the vehicle; & Locks the vehicle=é smart fortwo coupé: Opens the

upper tailgate (press and hold)=é smart fortwo cabrio: Opens the soft

top (press and hold)

X To unlock centrally: press the % button.The turn signals flash once.

i After unlocking, open the vehicle withinapproximately 2 minutes to prevent it fromlocking itself and priming the anti-theftalarm system again.

X To unlock and open the upper tailgate (smart fortwo coupé): press and hold theº or é button.

X To open the soft top to the B-pillar (smart fortwo cabrio): press and hold the º oré button.

X To lock centrally: press the & button.The turn signals flash twice.

X To activate the double-lock function (only for England): press the & button twice.The turn signals flash twice long and threetimes short

Opening the door

X Press the # button on the key.X Open the door.

i After unlocking, open the vehicle withinapproximately two minutes to prevent itfrom locking itself and priming the anti-theft alarm system again.

Correct driver's seat position

G WARNING

You could lose control of the vehicle whiledriving if you:

Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheelor mirror

Rfasten the seat belt.


Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirror and fasten the seat belt beforestarting the engine.

Observe the following rules on the correctdriver's seat position:

Rthe driver must be as far away from thedriver's airbag as possible (Y page 38).Rthe driver must be wearing seat belt =

properly.

54 Correct driver's seat position>>

En

teri

ng

and

set

tin

g u

p.

Rthe driver must be able to depress the ped-als properly.Rthe driver must be able to move their legs

freely.Rthe driver must be able to reach steering

wheel : with their arms slightly bent.Rthe driver must be able to see all the dis-

plays in the instrument cluster clearly.Rmove seat backrest ; to an almost vertical

position.Rsit in a normal upright position.Rthe seat belt must fit snugly across your

body.Rthe seat belt must be routed across the

middle of your shoulder.Rthe seat belt must be routed in your pelvic

area across the hip joints.Radjust the rear-view and exterior mirrors

so that the driver has a good view of theroad and traffic.

Adjusting the seats

Please note

G WARNING

If children adjust the seats, they couldbecome trapped, especially if they areunattended. There is a risk of injury.


G WARNING

If the driver's seat is not correctlyengaged, it could unexpectedly move whiledriving. This could cause you to lose con-trol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.

Always ensure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the vehicle.

G WARNING

When adjusting a seat, you or anothervehicle occupant could become trapped bythe guide rail of the seat, for instance.There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that no one has any part of theirbody within the sweep of the seat whenadjusting it.

G WARNING

The seat belt does not offer the intendedlevel of protection if you have not movedthe backrest to an almost vertical position.When braking or in the event of an acci-dent, you could slide underneath the seatbelt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries,for example. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that thebackrest is in an almost vertical positionand that the shoulder section of your seat-belt is routed across the centre of yourshoulder.

G WARNING

The steering wheel may move unexpect-edly if you adjust it while driving. Thiscould cause you to lose control of the vehi-cle. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that the steering wheel is lockedbefore driving off. Never unlock the steer-ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNING






! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmoving the seats back. There is a risk thatthe seats and/or the objects could be dam-aged.

Adjusting the seats 55

>> E

nte

rin

g an

d s

etti

ng

up

.

Z

Observe the safety notes on "Airbags"(Y page 38) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 40).

Adjusting the seat fore-and-aft posi-tion

Seat with a lever

Seat with a handwheel

To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position, theseat belt must not be fastened.

X Lift lever =.X Slide the seat forwards or backwards.

The seat engages audibly.

Adjusting the seat hight (seat with alever only)

X Pull handle ; up or push it down severaltimes.

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with alever)

X Pull lever : forwards.X At the same time, move the backrest for-

wards or backwards.

Adjusting the seat backrest (seat with ahandwheel)

X Turn handwheel ? forwards or back-wards.

Adjusting the steering wheel

G WARNING

The steering wheel may move unexpect-edly if you adjust it while driving. Thiscould cause you to lose control of the vehi-cle. There is a risk of an accident.

Make sure that the steering wheel is lockedbefore driving off. Never unlock the steer-ing wheel when the vehicle is in motion.

G WARNING






G WARNING

Children could become trapped by thesteering wheel if they adjust it. There is arisk of injury.


56 Adjusting the steering wheel>>

En

teri

ng

and

set

tin

g u

p.

X Fold down lever :.X Set desired steering wheel height 2.X Fold up lever :.X Check that the steering column is locked.

Adjusting the mirrors

Adjusting the interior mirror

X Move the interior mirror up, down, left orright.

Manually setting the interior mirror toanti-dazzle mode

X Fold lever : forwards.

Understanding automatic anti-dazzlemode of interior mirror

Please note

G WARNING

Electrolyte may escape if the glass in anautomatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. Theelectrolyte is harmful and causes irrita-tion. It must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes, respiratory organs orclothing or be swallowed. There is a risk ofinjury.

If you come into contact with the electro-lyte, observe the following:

RRinse off the electrolyte from your skinimmediately with water.

RImmediately rinse the electrolyte out ofyour eyes thoroughly with clean water.

RIf the electrolyte is swallowed, immedi-ately rinse your mouth out thoroughly.Do not induce vomiting.

RIf electrolyte comes into contact withyour skin or hair or is swallowed, seekmedical attention immediately.

RImmediately change out of clothingwhich has come into contact with elec-trolyte.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med-ical attention immediately.

Useful information

The interior mirror automatically goes intoanti-dazzle mode if simultaneously:

Rthe ignition is switched onRincident light from headlamps hits the

sensor in the interior mirrorThe interior mirror does not go into anti-dazzle mode if reverse gear is engaged or ifthe interior lighting is switched on.

Adjusting the mirrors 57

>> E

nte

rin

g an

d s

etti

ng

up

.

Z

Adjusting the exterior mirrors man-ually

G WARNING






G WARNING

The exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects visible in the mirrors arecloser than they appear. You could mis-judge the distance from road users drivingbehind you when changing lanes, forinstance. There is a risk of an accident.

You should therefore always look over yourshoulder to determine the actual distancefrom road users driving behind you.

X Move lever : up, down, left or right.

Adjusting the exterior mirrors electri-cally

In order to adjust the exterior mirrors elec-trically, the ignition must be switched on.

X To select the left or right exterior mirror:turn control = left 1 or right 2.

X To adjust the exterior mirrors: move con-trol = up, down, left or right.

58 Adjusting the mirrors>>

En

teri

ng

and

set

tin

g u

p.

Starting the engine

Please note

G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they can:

Ropen doors and endanger other personsor road users

Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic

Roperate vehicle equipment and, forexample, trap themselves.

Children could also set the vehicle inmotion, for example by:

Rreleasing the parking brake

Rshifting the automatic transmission outof park position P

Rstarting the engine.

There is a risk of an accident and injury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take thekey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.Always keep the key out of reach of chil-dren.

G WARNING

If you attach heavy or large objects to thekey, the key could be unintentionallyturned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. Thereis a risk of an accident.

Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe key. Remove any bulky keyrings beforeinserting the key into the ignition lock.

u To insert the key into the ignition lock1 To switch on the power supply2 To switch on the ignition3 To start the engine

Automatic transmission

X Turn the key to position 3.The READY indicator appears in the instru-ment cluster. A tone sounds.

X Shift out of transmission position j or i.

Pulling away

Please note

G WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell can impedepedal travel or block a pedal which isdepressed. This jeopardises safe operationof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Stow all objects in the vehicle safely, sothat they cannot reach the driver's foot-well. Make sure the floormats and carpetsare properly secured so that they cannotslip and obstruct the pedals. Do not layseveral floormats or carpets on top of oneanother.

G WARNING

Unsuitable footwear can hinder correctusage of the pedals, e.g.:

Rshoes with thick soles

Rshoes with high heels

Rslippers

Pulling away 59

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z


Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNING

If you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only avail-able with limitations, or not at all. Thiscould affect, for example, the power steer-ing and the brake boosting effect. You willrequire considerably more effort to steerand brake. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not switch off the ignition while driv-ing.

Note the following when pulling away:

RDo not drive with the parking brakeapplied.RUse caution when pulling away on slippery

surfaces.RDo not allow tyres to spin.RDepress the brake pedal and keep it

depressed.RPress the release button on the selector

lever.RShift the gear selector lever to position h

or k.

Using the parking brake

Please note

G WARNING

If the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brakecan:

Roverheat and cause a fire

Rlose its hold function.

There is a risk of fire and an accident.Release the parking brake fully beforedriving off.

G WARNING

If you must brake the vehicle with theparking brake, the braking distance isconsiderably longer and the wheels could

lock. This increases the risk of skiddingand an accident.

Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. Ifthe wheels lock, release the parking brakeuntil the wheels begin turning again.

G WARNING

If you leave children unattended in thevehicle, they may be able to set the vehiclein motion if, for example, they:

Rrelease the parking brake

Rshift the automatic transmission out ofpark position P

Rstart the engine

In addition, they may operate vehicleequipment and become trapped. There is arisk of an accident and injury.


Applying the parking brake

X Pull parking brake ; upwards.

The brake lights do not light up when youbrake the vehicle with the parking brake.

Releasing the parking brake

X depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press release button : on parkingbrake ; and move the parking brake downto the stop.

60 Pulling away>>

Dri

vin

g.

Hill start assist

G WARNING

After a while, hill start assist no longerholds the vehicle and it may roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hillstart assist.

Hill start assist keeps the vehicle in placewhen driving uphill as soon as the brakepedal is released.Hill start assist is only active in the follow-ing situations:

Rwhen pulling away on an uphill slopeRwhen the parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is not in position iRESP® is functioning correctly.

X Release the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about one sec-ond.

X Pull away.

Automatic transmission

Please note

G WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the auto-matic transmission shifts into neutralposition N. The vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P beforeswitching off the engine. Secure the parkedvehicle against rolling away by applyingthe parking brake.

Transmission position display

! Only shift into transmission positionsB, C or A when the vehicle isstationary. Otherwise, you may damagethe transmission.

The following transmission positions areavailable:

RB Park positionPosition j should not be used to brake thevehicle when parking. To secure the vehi-cle, apply the parking brake in addition toshifting to transmission position j.RC Reverse gearRA Neutral

No power is transmitted from the engine tothe drive wheels.R7 Drive

Changing the transmission position

B Park position with parking lockC Reverse gearA Neutral7 Drive

The ignition must be switched on in order toshift the transmission to positions j, i ork. To shift the transmission from positionj, you must also depress the brake pedal.

X Press release knob :.X Shift the selector lever to the desired

transmission position.

Maximum acceleration (kickdown)

To reach maximum acceleration, use kick-down:

X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.

Automatic transmission 61

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Using the turn signals

The ignition must be switched on in order touse the turn signals.

X To indicate: press the combination switchin the direction of arrow 1 (right) or 2(left) past the point of resistance.

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the point of resistance.The turn signal flashes three times.

Acoustic presence indicator

Useful information

Vehicles with an electric motor generatemuch less driving noise than vehicles withinternal combustion engines. As a result, thevehicle may not be heard by other road usersin certain situations.In order to allow your vehicle to be heardwhen it is moving at slow speeds, a soundgenerator installed in the vehicle produces aspecific noise at speeds between 0 and30 km/h. This function is called the acousticpresence indicator. This helps other roadusers, particularly pedestrians and cyclists,to hear your vehicle better. The acousticpresence indicator can also be heard in thevehicle interior.The volume of the acoustic presence indica-tor depends on the engine speed. The fasteryou accelerate, the louder the sound is. Atspeeds of over 30 km/h, the sound is switchedoff. Above this speed, the driving noise nat-urally created by the vehicle is typicallysufficient for the vehicle to be heard in goodtime by other road users.

Deactivating/activating the acousticpresence indicator

The acoustic presence indicator is automat-ically activated each time the ignition isstarted.

X Press the switch.If the acoustic presence indicator is deac-

tivated, the LED on the switch lightsup.

Radar-based recuperation

Only for instrument cluster with colour dis-play:The "Radar-based recuperation" functionadapts the vehicle's rate of recuperation tocurrent traffic conditions. It activates itselfautomatically as soon as the acceleratorpedal is released. There are five levels up tothe maximum value for optimum recupera-tion and distance to the vehicle ahead. Themaximum value can vary depending on thecharge status of the battery and the batterytemperature.Radar sensors measure the distance to andthe speed of a vehicle ahead. The shorter thedistance to the vehicle ahead, the greater therecuperation. When recuperation is high, thebrake lamps also light up. The current levelof recuperation is not shown in the powerdisplay (Y page 64).Radar-based recuperation is not active inthe following cases:

Rthe radar sensor system is malfunctioningRthe connection to the radar is interruptedRActive Brake Assist is deactivatedRECO mode is switched on

62 Radar-based recuperation>>

Dri

vin

g.

Rthe vehicle speed is too lowRthe transmission is in position k or iRadar-based recuperation is switched offwhen ECO mode is activated.On-board computer with colour display: the

symbol in the display indicates thestatus of radar-based recuperation:

R lights up white: switched on, notactiveR lights up green: switched on, activeR is not displayed: Active Brake Assist

is deactivated or the radar sensor is mal-functioning

On-board computer with colour display:radar-based recuperation is switched on andoff in the on-board computer (Y page 103).Observe the notes on safe driving(Y page 51).

Driving economically

Notes on economical driving

In order to save energy, with smart electricdrive a part of the kinetic energy is recuper-ated and stored in the high-voltage battery.When the driver releases the acceleratorpedal, the vehicle decelerates.In the following cases, the vehicle does notdecelerate, or only decelerates to a limitedextent, when the accelerator pedal isreleased:

Rthe gear lever is in position h and thevehicle is rolling backwardsRthe gear lever is in position k and the

vehicle is rolling forwardsOn steep slopes, the vehicle may not be heldat all or only be held to a limited degree.In the following cases recuperation isrestricted:

Rthe high-voltage battery is fully chargedor too coldRthe power electronics or motor has over-

heatedRecommendations for driving economically:

Raccelerate moderatelyRobserve the power availability display

(Y page 64)

Rdrive with careRuse the air conditioning and the electrical

consumers sparinglyRhave maintenance work carried out at the

specified service intervalsYou can use ECO mode in order to save moreenergy.ECO mode has the following characteristics:

Rreduced torque and significantly reducedpower. This supports a particularly effi-cient, steady driving style. The speed isreduced to approx. 110 km/h.Rthe performance of the air-conditioning

and heating systems is reducedRthe maximum available recuperation is

activatedRreduced accelerationRthe "radar-based recuperation" function

is switched offTo increase acceleration when in ECO mode,depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.

Switching ECO mode on and off

X Press button :.If the energy-saving function is activated,the ECO display is shown in the on-boardcomputer.The energy-saving function is switchedoff when the ignition is restarted.

Driving economically 63

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Power and charge level display

Useful information

: Power display; Charge level display

Power display : and charge level display ;can be adjusted to the left or right. Thecharge level display lights up when thevehicle is unlocked.

Power display

! Do not hang any objects on the powerdisplay.This could cause the dashboard clock to betorn out of its anchorage point and beseverely damaged.

Power display : contains two areas:

RArea to the right of 0The current power that the high-voltagebattery provides is shown here. 100% cor-responds to the peak performance of thehigh-voltage battery.RArea to the left of 0

The vehicle's level of recuperation in over-run mode and when braking is shown here.

The LED ring in power display : shows thepower output available.If the needle for power display : is in the"OFF" position, the vehicle is not ready todrive because:

Rthe ignition is switched offRthe gear lever has not been moved to posi-

tion i or j to start the drive systemRthe charging cable is still connected to the

vehicle socket

Rthere is insufficient power available fromthe high-voltage batteryRthere is a malfunction in the vehicle's

high-voltage electrical systemIf the drive system has been started, the nee-dle of power display : is in position "0". TheREADY indicator appears in the instrumentcluster. A tone sounds. The vehicle is readyfor driving.

Charge level display

! Do not hang any objects on the chargelevel gauge.This could cause the charge level gauge tobe torn out of its anchorage point and bedamaged.

Charge level display ; displays the chargestatus of the high-voltage battery as a per-centage.The high-voltage battery has reached thereserve level in the following cases:

Rthe Battery Reserve Level messageappears in the displayRcharge level display ; is in the red area

i Charge the high-voltage battery whenthe charge falls below 20%.

Understanding the eco score display inthe on-board computer

Useful information

The eco score display provides informationon how to drive economically.A higher percentage indicates a more eco-nomical driving style.The percentage of the eco score display isonly calculated after a short distance. If theignition remains switched off for longer thanfour hours, the eco score display will be reset.

64 Driving economically>>

Dri

vin

g.

Monochrome display

The percentage of the eco score displayincreases when you:

Raccelerate with moderationRavoid unnecessary acceleration and

deceleration

Colour display

The percentage in the eco score display iscalculated using the following categories:

RSpeed: the value increases when driving atlow speeds.RAnticipation: the value increases when

unnecessary acceleration and decelera-tion is avoided.

Using the eco score display in the smartMedia-System

Calling up the eco score menu

X Select Vehicle > eco score.

Evaluating the current trip

X Select Current trip .The following rating information and val-ues appear:

RBar graphs for accelerate, anticipa‐tory and shiftRBar graphs for Speed and AnticipationRDistance coveredRTotal eco score as a percentage

Saving the current trip

X Select Current trip > Save.X Select the category under which you want

to save the trip.The values for the current trip will beadded to the category selected and thecurrent trip will be reset. In the instrumentcluster, the trip computer values will bereturned to “From reset”.The values for the current trip will beadded to the category selected and thecurrent trip will be reset. In the instrumentcluster, the values for the "From start" tripcomputer and eco score display will bereset.

Comparing the current trip with thesaved trips from a category

: Last trip saved in this category; Average value for the category= Best trip in the category

X Select Current trip > W > Compare.X Select category.

A comparison of the values for the currenttrip with the values of the selected cate-gory appears.

X Select the comparison value :, ; or =.The current trip is compared to the respec-tive comparison value from the category.

Driving economically 65

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Resetting the current trip data

X Select Current trip > Reset.X Select Yes.

In the instrument cluster, the trip com-puter values will be returned to “Fromreset”.In the instrument cluster, the values forthe "From start" trip computer and ecoscore display will be reset.

Activating/deactivating eco score after atrip

X To activate: select Current trip > W >Show eco score after trip.

X To deactivate: select Current trip > W >Hide eco score after trip.

Displaying eco score for saved trips in acategory

X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐red trips.

X Select category.eco score contains the following compari-son values for each category:RSummaryRLast valueRAverage valueRBest valueThe following types of evaluations areavailable for the Last trip saved cate-gory:RSummaryRDetailed report

Renaming a category

At least one trip must be stored in the respec-tive category.

X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐red trips > W > Rename this category.

Resetting the eco score of one category

At least one trip must be stored in the respec-tive category.

X Select Vehicle > eco score > My prefer‐red trips > W > Reset this category.

Braking correctly

Please note

G WARNING

The braking system can overheat if youleave your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This increases the braking dis-tance and could even cause the brakingsystem to fail. There is a risk of an acci-dent.

Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Donot simultaneously depress both the brakepedal and the accelerator pedal whiledriving.

The vehicle decelerates as soon as yourelease the accelerator pedal. This aids recu-peration as the motor is used as a generatorand charges the high-voltage battery.

Braking on steep downhill gradients

Observe the following rules when driving ondownhill gradients:

Rdo not move the selector lever to positioniRif recuperation is restricted, also brake at

intervals

Braking on wet road surfaces

There may be a delayed brake response whendriving on wet roads, after driving through acar wash or after driving through deep water.

X Maintain a greater distance to the vehiclein front.

X Brake more firmly.

Braking on salt-treated roads

When driving on salt-treated roads, a layerof salt may form on the brake discs and pads.This increases the vehicle's braking dis-tance.

66 Braking correctly>>

Dri

vin

g.

X In order to prevent any salt build-up,apply the brakes occasionally while pay-ing attention to the traffic conditions.

X Brake carefully at the end of the journeyand when starting the next journey.

X Maintain a greater distance to the vehiclein front.

Driving on wet roads

Aquaplaning

Depending on driving style and tyre treaddepths, aquaplaning can occur on the road.Adapt your driving style as follows:

X Reduce the speed.X Brake carefully.X Avoid sudden steering movements.X Avoid tyre ruts.

Fording

! Bear in mind that vehicles travelling infront or in the opposite direction createwaves. This may cause the maximum per-missible water depth to be exceeded.These notes must be observed under allcircumstances. You could otherwise dam-age the engine, the electronics or thetransmission.

Observe the following when driving throughstanding water:

X Do not drive through water that is higherthan the lower edge of the vehicle body.

X Drive at walking pace.

Winter driving

X Before the start of winter, have the vehiclechecked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Use winter tyres and, if applicable, snowchains.

X Drive carefully and avoid sudden acceler-ation, turning and braking on slipperyroad surfaces.

X Do not use cruise control.

X If the vehicle skids, take corrective steer-ing actions to counteract the movement.

X If the vehicle skids, shift the transmissionto position i.

X Do not use the outside temperature displayas a way to determine if conditions are icy.

X Observe the road surface.

Lane Keeping Assist

Please note

G WARNING

Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearlydetect lane markings.

In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can:

Rissue an unnecessary warning

Rnot issue a warning


Always pay particular attention to thetraffic situation and keep within the lane,especially if Lane Keeping Assist alertsyou.

G WARNING

The Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane.There is a risk of an accident.

Always steer, apply the brakes or acceler-ate the vehicle yourself, especially if LaneKeeping Assist alerts you.

Lane Keeping Assist issues an acoustic andvisual warning when a vehicle unintention-ally leaves the lane.Lane Keeping Assist uses a camera which islocated on the windscreen behind the rear-view mirror.Lane Keeping Assist does not keep your vehi-cle in its lane. The driver is responsible fordriving the vehicle in a safe manner andstaying within the lane.Lane Keeping Assist could be impaired or failto respond under the following conditions:

Rpoor visibilityRstrong glaring lightRdirty windscreen in the camera area

Lane Keeping Assist 67

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Runclear or broken lane markingsRvery narrow and winding roadsRhighly variable shade conditions on the

roadWhen the turn signal is set, warnings aresuppressed for a certain period of time.No warning is given in the following situa-tions:

Rwhen crossing a lane marking quicklyRat speeds below 70 km/hOn-board computer with monochrome dis-play: the ¸ and ¤ symbols in the dis-play indicate the status of Lane KeepingAssist:

R¸: speed is below 70 km/h or lanes arenot detected due to external causes. Nowarning is given when the vehicle leavesthe lane.R¤: speed is above 70 km/h and the sys-

tem is able to detect lane markings. Awarning is given if the vehicle uninten-tionally leaves the detected lane.

On-board computer with colour display: The¸ symbol in the display indicates thestatus of Lane Keeping Assist:

R¸ lights up white: speed is below70 km/h or lanes are not detected due toexternal causes. No warning is given whenthe vehicle leaves the lane.R¸ lights up green: speed is above

70 km/h and the system is able to detectlane markings. A warning is given if thevehicle unintentionally leaves the detec-ted lane.

Activating and deactivating LaneKeeping Assist

X Press the switch.When Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated,

the LED on the switch lights up.On-board computer with colour display:the display also shows a message.

When the ignition is restarted, the last set-ting of Lane Keeping Assist is retained.

Cruise control and limiter

Please note

G WARNING

If you call up the stored speed and thisdiffers from your current speed, the vehi-cle will accelerate. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle can accelerateunexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.

Before you call up the stored speed, payattention to traffic conditions. If you do notknow the stored speed, store the desiredspeed again.

Cruise control is used in order to drive at aconstant speed for a prolonged period. Thelimiter helps to avoid exceeding a storedspeed.The driver is responsible for driving thevehicle in a safe manner, controlling thevehicle speed and braking in good time.If there is a change of drivers, inform the newdriver of the speed stored.The two driver assist systems require thefollowing:

Rfavourable weather and good visibilityRgood road and traffic conditionsThe cruise control and limiter systems do notbrake automatically.

Rreduce the vehicle speed by applying thebrakes

Speed regulation is cancelled when the fol-lowing occur:

Rbraking (including the parking brake)RESP® interventionOn downhill gradients or when acceleratingbriefly, cruise control may interrupt speed

68 Cruise control and limiter>>

Dri

vin

g.

regulation. Afterwards, the set speed isapplied again.On downhill slopes, the limiter can exceedthe set speed. In this case, the stored speedflashes in the display and a warning tonesounds.Cruise control is ready for use at speedsabove 30 km/h. With the limiter, speeds of30 km/h and over can be set as the maximumspeed.Cruise control and limiter cannot be activa-ted at the same time.

Activating cruise control or the limiter

X Press top (cruise control) or bottom (lim-iter) of button :.The ¯ (cruise control) or È (limiter)button appears in the instrument clusterdisplay.

Storing the current speed

X Press ® button ;.Limiter: the stored speed appears next tothe È symbol in the instrument clusterdisplay.Cruise control: the stored speed appearsnext to the ¯ symbol in the instrumentcluster display.

Adjusting the stored speed

X Press (+) or (-) button ; until the desiredspeed is reached.

Interrupting cruise control and thelimiter

X Press ± button ?.The stored speed can be accessed againlater.

The stored speed is deleted when the engineis switched off.

Calling up the stored speed

X Press ° button =.X Cruise control: release the accelerator

pedal.

Deactivating cruise control or the lim-iter

X Press button : to OFF centre position. The¯ or È symbol in the instrumentcluster display goes out. The stored speedis deleted.

The stored speed is deleted when the engineis switched off.

Charging the high-voltage battery

Please note

G DANGER

The vehicle's high voltage electrical sys-tem is under high voltage. If you modifycomponents in the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system or touch damaged com-ponents, you may be electrocuted. Thecomponents in the vehicle's high-voltageelectrical system may be damaged in anaccident, although the damage is not visi-ble. There is a risk of fatal injury.

Do not touch any high-voltage componentsafter an accident and never modify thevehicle's high-voltage electrical system.Have the vehicle towed away after an acci-dent and the vehicle's high-voltage elec-trical system checked by a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Charging the high-voltage battery 69

>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

G WARNING

In the event of a vehicle fire, the internalpressure of the high-voltage battery couldexceed a critical value. In this case, flam-mable gas escapes through a vent valve inthe vehicle's underbody. The gas canignite. There is a risk of injury.

Leave the danger area immediately. Securethe danger area at a suitable distance,whilst observing legal requirements.

G DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to themains supply via incorrectly installedmains sockets or by means of adapters,extension cables or similar could cause afire or an electric shock. There is a risk offatal injury.

To avoid hazardous situations, observe thefollowing:

ROnly connect the charging cable tomains sockets:

- which have been properly installedand

- which have been inspected by a quali-fied electrician

RFor safety reasons, only use the charg-ing cables supplied with the vehicle, orcharging cables which have beenapproved for use with this vehicle.

RNever use a damaged charging cable.

RDo not use:

- extension cables

- extension reels

- multiple sockets

RNever use socket adapters to connect thecharging cable to the mains socket. Theonly exception being if the adapter hasbeen tested and approved by the manu-facturer for charging the high-voltagebattery of an electric vehicle.

RObserve the safety notes in the operat-ing instructions for the socket adapter.

G DANGER

Connecting the charging cable to the wall-box via an incorrectly installed wallbox orby means of adapters, extension cables orsimilar could cause a fire or an electricshock. There is a risk of fatal injury.

To avoid such risks, observe the following:

ROnly connect the charging cable to awallbox:

- which has been properly installed and

- has been inspected by a qualifiedelectrician

RFor safety reasons, only use chargingcables which have been tested andapproved for charging the high-voltagebattery of an electric vehicle.

RNever use damaged charging cables.

RDo not connect the charging cable to anamplifier.

RDo not extend the charging cable.

RNever use an adapter.

RObserve the safety notes in the operat-ing instructions for the wallbox.

G DANGER

Charging the high-voltage battery with acharging cable that does not function cor-rectly could cause a fire or an electricshock. There is a risk of fatal injury!


REnsure that there are no fluids or foreignobjects in the charging cable connectoror on the charging cable socket beforeconnecting the charging cable connec-tor and the charging cable coupling.

RDo not place the charging cable in water,fluids or snow.

RCheck the charging cable for faults, e.g.for damage to the charging cable con-nector and the charging cable socket aswell as for cuts or tears in the cableinsulation.

70 Charging the high-voltage battery>>

Dri

vin

g.

In cases of damage, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

RCheck the charging cable connector andthe charging cable coupling for rust orcorrosion.

In cases of damage due to rust or corro-sion, do not charge the high-voltagebattery and contact a qualified special-ist workshop.

G DANGER

The high-voltage battery charging proc-ess involves high voltage. If you use thecharging cable, the charging cable socketor the charging cable connector incor-rectly during the charging process, itcould cause a fire or you could receive anelectric shock. There is a risk of fatalinjury!


RDo not pull out the charging cable con-nector or the charging cable socket dur-ing the charging process.

RDo not charge the high-voltage batteryin temperatures of over 50 † and below-40 †.

RDo not drive over charging cable con-nector.

RAvoid sharp impacts which could dam-age the insulating protective cover.

RDo not pull on the charging cable.

RDo not touch the charging cable in thun-der and lightning.

RDo not handle the charging cable con-nector and the charging cable socketwith wet hands.

RDo not use the charging cable for anyother purpose than to charge the high-voltage battery.

ROnly use the supplied charging cable tocharge the high-voltage battery.

RIf you notice an unusual odour develop,or notice smoke or burn marks, stop

charging immediately and contact aqualified specialist workshop.

RAfter charging the high-voltage battery,store the charging cable in the chargingcable bag and keep the charging cableout of reach of children and animals.

RCheck the maximum rating of the fuses ofthe vehicle which is charged when sta-tionary.

RCheck whether the external mains sup-ply has a sufficient fuse in the building.

G DANGER

If prior to usage the charging cable is notprepared correctly, it could cause a fire oran electric shock. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.


RBefore using the charging cable for thefirst time, remove the adhesive tapewhich holds the cable together.

RUnwind the charging cable fully beforeevery charging process.

REnsure that the charging cable is nottwisted. Otherwise, the charging cablemay overheat and the cable coveringmay be damaged.

RDo not insert any objects which conductelectricity into the charging cable con-nector or the charging cable socket.

RDo not make any changes or modifica-tions to the charging cable.

Since the vehicle's high-voltage electricalsystem is under high voltage, observe thefollowing:

Rdo not tamper with high-voltage compo-nents or the orange cables of the vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical systemRnever touch the high-voltage components

or the orange cables of the high-voltageelectrical system in a vehicle which hasbeen involved in an accident


>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Rnever touch any damaged components orthe damaged orange cables of the vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical systemRdo not remove the covers of the high-volt-

age electrical system components that aremarked with a yellow warning sticker

For safety reasons, only use the chargingcable which is supplied with the vehicle orhas been approved by smart for this vehicle.Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging.

Useful information

Method of operation

The vehicle is equipped with a high-voltagebattery for driving. The high-voltage bat-tery stores the energy needed to operate theelectric motor and releases it again.The electric motor uses energy stored in thehigh-voltage battery for pulling away andaccelerating.In overrun mode, kinetic energy is convertedinto electrical energy by recuperation andstored in the high-voltage battery.In addition to recuperation, the high-voltagebattery can be charged as follows:

Rwith the suitable charging cable at a mainssocket while the vehicle is stationaryRwith the suitable charging cable at a wall-

box while the vehicle is stationaryRwith the suitable charging cable at a

charging station while the vehicle is sta-tionary

: Charging cable for charging at a chargingstation or wallbox

; Charging cable for charging at a mainssocket

The different versions of charging cables aredistinguished by their charging cable con-nectors. Charging cables which are chargedat a mains socket also have controls.The options listed for charging a high-volt-age battery are not available in all countries.The high-voltage battery can be charged in anominal voltage range from 100 V to 480 Vwith a charging cable at a charging station orwallbox.

i If possible only charge the high-voltagebattery when the charge is below 80%.Charge the high-voltage battery at thelatest when the charge falls below 20%.

Discharged high-voltage battery

The high-voltage electrical system switchesoff if the high-voltage battery is completelydischarged. This protects the high-voltagebattery from exhaustive discharge.

i Switching the ignition on and then offcan reactivate the high-voltage electricalsystem temporarily. The vehicle can thenbe parked safely.

Do not leave the vehicle with a discharged oralmost fully discharged high-voltage bat-tery for longer than 14 days. You can checkthe charge status in the charge level display(Y page 64).

Extreme outside temperatures

The efficiency of the high-voltage battery istemperature-dependent and is significantlyreduced at low or high temperatures. In addi-tion, the electrolytes used may freeze at verylow temperatures.The LED ring in the power output displayshows the power output available(Y page 64).

Energy consumption and range

The available energy in the high-voltagebattery is basically reduced by the followingfactors:

Rlow outside temperaturesRoperating the air-conditioning system or

heatingRswitching on electrical consumers


Dri

vin

g.

Leaving the vehicle parked for an extendedperiod at low outdoor temperatures withoutcharging it can lead to the following:

Rhigh-voltage battery output is signifi-cantly reducedRcharge times can be longerRrange can be significantly reducedIn extreme cases, it may not be possible tostart the vehicle as a result. You shouldtherefore always ensure that the high-volt-age battery is fully charged or that thecharging cable is connected when parkingthe vehicle for an extended period of time atlow outside temperatures.As the high-voltage battery ages, the capa-city of the high-voltage battery will dimin-ish over the battery's lifetime. This meansthat the maximum range and the maximumacceleration are reduced.

Battery care

Observe the following notes on battery care:

Ravoid storing or transporting the vehiclein high temperatures over a long period(e.g. container transport).Rconnect the vehicle to a power supply

when parking it for an extended period oftime.RTemperatures below Ò25 † for more than

seven days can cause irreversible damageto the vehicle due to frost damage.

Terms of use

Observe the information on exceptions andlimitations in the warranty documentationand in the Service Booklet.

Voltage surge protector

! Overvoltage in the mains supply candamage the vehicle. The vehicle is there-fore equipped with a device which protectsit from overvoltage in the mains supply.This device may be triggered duringsevere thunderstorms, for example, andmay lead to the building's circuit breakerbeing tripped and an interruption in thepower supply. These functions protect thevehicle. After the building's circuitbreaker is switched on again, the chargingprocess resumes automatically. Following

an interruption in the power supply with-out the building's circuit breaker beingtripped, it may take up to ten minutes forcharging to resume automatically.

After the device has triggered, switch thebuilding's fuse unit on again. Otherwise, thecharging process will not resume.

Heat generated by the charging cableand charging cable connector

Charging cables and charging cable connec-tors may heat up during the charging proc-ess at a power socket.In the following cases, the degree of heatingis within the permissible limits:

Rthe mains supply and charging cableinfrastructure are intactRthe instructions for handling the charging

cable and control panel of the chargingcable are observed

If heating up beyond the permissible limitsoccurs, have the mains supply infrastructurechecked.

Disposing of a charging cable

Do not dispose of a charging cable withhousehold rubbish, give it to a suitable recy-cling service. Abide by the potential legalrequirements for recycling.


>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Understanding the vehicle socket

Vehicle socket overview

: Charge socket flap; Socket cap= Locking mechanism? Indicator lampA Vehicle socket

Indicator lamp on the vehicle socket

When the indicator lamp on the vehiclesocket lights up, this means the following:

Indicator lamp

Flashesgreen slowly

High-voltage battery ischarging.

Lights upgreen

High-voltage battery isfully charged.

Flashesorangeslowly

Vehicle waiting for charg-ing to start.

Flashesorange

Vehicle is paused fromcharging.

Flashes redquickly

A malfunction occurredduring charging.

Charging the battery at a charging sta-tion or wall box

Charging stations without communica-tions functionality

Charging stations without communicationsfunctionality must be activated beforecharging, e.g. by using an RFID card. Observethe notes provided by the charging stationoperator.

Charging stations with communicationcapabilities (Plug&Charge)

If the vehicle is connected to a charging sta-tion with communication capabilities, infor-mation and technical parameters areexchanged so that the charging process canbe started without additional activation.This function is called "Plug&Charge".Due to the data transfer, it may take up to30 seconds after the charging cable is con-nected before charging begins.

i International Standard ISO 15118 is usedfor the communication between the vehicleand the intelligent charging station.

A suitable electricity contract is required inorder to use "Plug&Charge". To arrange this,contact the charging station operator.

Connecting a charging cable

: Charge socket flap; Socket cap


Dri

vin

g.

= Locking mechanism? Indicator lampA Vehicle socket

X Wallbox without a pre-installed cable or charging station: before using the charg-ing cable for the first time, remove theadhesive tape, which holds the cabletogether.

X Fully unwind the charging cable beforecharging.

X Engage transmission position j.X Turn the key to position u in the ignition

lock and remove it.X Open socket flap : (Y page 74).X Release locking mechanism = on socket

cap ;.Socket cap ; opens.

X Wallbox without a preinstalled cable:insert the charging cable connector intothe wallbox socket to the stop.

X Insert the charging cable connector intovehicle socket A to the stop.The vehicle socket locks audibly.The high-voltage battery is charged and

the indicator lamp on the vehiclesocket slowly flashes green.

i The high-voltage battery is fully

charged when the indicator lamp onthe vehicle socket lights up green.

i The vehicle must not be moved duringcharging. The gear lever cannot be shiftedfrom position j.

i Depending on the temperature, theengine cooling system and battery coolingsystem may audibly switch on during thecharging process.

Removing the charging cable

The charging cable may be removed when thecharging process has completed or has beencancelled.

! Always disconnect the charging cablefrom the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-ing the charging cable from the stationarysocket first could damage the chargingcable connector.

X Press the % button on the key.

The indicator lamp ? above vehiclesocket A goes out.Vehicle socket A unlocks audibly.

X Disconnect the charging cable within60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other-wise, the vehicle will relock the vehiclesocket.The connector locking mechanism on thecharging station is opened.

X Close socket cap ;.X Close charge socket flap :.X Wallbox without a pre-mounted cable or

charging station: if necessary, disconnectthe charging cable from the wallbox andstow it in the charging cable bag(Y page 78).

Understanding the charging cable formains sockets

Useful information

! Only use the charging cable to charge thehigh-voltage battery. Do not use thecharging cable for other purposes. It mayotherwise be damaged.

Depending on the vehicle version, the vehicleis equipped with different charging cableversions. Charging cable versions differ intheir controls.Only use a charging cable which is approvedby smart for this vehicle.Do not leave the charging cable control panelhanging loose from a mains socket. Other-wise, this could lead to a bad contact with themains socket and to malfunctions whencharging the vehicle.Never lift or carry the control panel by thecharging cable connector or the mains plug.Only for charging cable version 1: beforecharging at a mains socket, check the maxi-mum permissible charge current for the cor-responding mains socket or building. Themaximum value of the charge current is set tothe country-specific setting for the suppliedcharging cable. When charging abroad, themaximum value may exceed that of the coun-try you are in. Observe the regulations spe-cific to the country you are in if chargingabroad. Consult a qualified specialist work-


>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

shop if you have questions about charge cur-rent settings or a malfunction.

Controls of charging cable version 1

: Voltage indicator lamp; Charging process indicator lamp= Indicator lamp temperature monitor? Electrical fuse and control system indi-

cator lamp

The indicator lamps on the charging cableindicate the following:

Indicator lamp :

Lights upwhite

Voltage is switched on. Thehigh-voltage battery canbe charged.

Indicator lamp ;

Flashesgreen


Indicator lamp =

Lights upred

With flashing green indica-tor lamp ;: the charge out-put is reduced due to over-temperature.Without flashing greenindicator lamp ;: charg-ing was terminated due toovertemperature on thecharging cable.

Flashes red Charging was terminateddue to overtemperature onthe mains socket.

Indicator lamp ?

Flashes redquickly

An internal malfunctionhas occurred. The high-voltage battery cannot becharged.The infrastructure has amalfunction. The high-voltage battery cannot becharged.

If the control element detects a fault currentor a malfunction, the charging process isinterrupted. The charging process will beresumed automatically when the malfunc-tion has been rectified.

Controls of charging cable version 2

: Indicator lamp for charge current setting; Voltage indicator lamp= Charging process indicator lamp? Electrical fuse and control system indi-

cator lampA Button for setting the charge current

The indicator lamps on the charging cableindicate the following:

Indicator lamp :

Lights upgreen

Value is set as the desiredcharging current.

Flashesorange

Depending on the mainssocket, the value cannot beset as the desired chargingcurrent.


Dri

vin

g.

Indicator lamp ;

Lights upgreen

Voltage is switched on. Thehigh-voltage battery canbe charged.

Indicator lamp =

Lights upgreen


Flashesorange

Connection to vehicle hasbeen made.

Indicator lamp ?

Lights upred

The current at the controlpanel is not correct. Thehigh-voltage battery can-not be charged.

For transportation, wrap the charging cablearound the control panel or secure it to thecontrol panel housing.

Setting the charging current (onlycharging cable version 2)

G WARNING

If the charge current draw via a mainssocket is too high during the chargingprocess, the external mains supply mayoverheat. There is a risk of fire.

Before charging, check the maximum per-missible charge current available at thelocation. If necessary, contact a qualifiedspecialist company for assistance.

Adjust your vehicle's settings, if neces-sary.

! If the charge current is too high, the fusecould be tripped or the external mainssupply could overheat. Check if the exter-nal mains supply is equipped to handle theprogrammed charge current. If necessary,reduce the programmed charge current oruse a different mains socket.

You can only limit the charging current forcharging the high-voltage battery with

charging cable version 2. This may protectthe mains supply from overloads.The maximum setting value and the adjust-ment values may vary from country to coun-try.The preset default value is the minimum set-ting. This is the minimum charge currentavailable from the mains supply.If the charging cable is left connected to thepower socket, the currently selected valueswill be used for the next charging process. Ifthe charging cable is removed from the powersocket, the values will be reset to the mini-mum setting for the next charging process.

X Check the maximum permissible chargecurrent for the relevant power socket.

X Insert the mains plug into the mainssocket.You have one minute to set the charge cur-rent.

X Press button A repeatedly until the indi-cator lamp in the desired setting lights upgreen.The desired value has been set.

i After one minute, the charge current canonly be set by restarting. To do so, removethe charging cable from the mains supplyand reinsert it into the mains socket.


>> D

rivi

ng.

Z

Charging the battery using a mainssocket

Connecting a charging cable

: Charge socket flap; Socket cap= Locking mechanism? Indicator lampA Vehicle socket

X Fully unwind the charging cable beforecharging.

X Engage transmission position j.X Turn the key to position u in the ignition

lock and remove it.X Open socket flap : (Y page 74).X Release locking mechanism = on socket

cap ;.Socket cap ; opens.

X Insert the mains plug into the mains socketto the stop.

X Only for charging cable version 2: set thedesired charge current.

X Insert the charging cable connector intovehicle socket A to the stop.The vehicle socket locks audibly.The high-voltage battery is charged and

the indicator lamp on the vehiclesocket slowly flashes green.

i The high-voltage battery is fully

charged when the indicator lamp onthe vehicle socket lights up green perma-nently.

i The vehicle must not be moved duringcharging. The gear lever cannot be shiftedfrom position j.

i Depending on the temperature, theengine cooling system and battery coolingsystem may audibly switch on during thecharging process.

i Only for charging cable version 2: ifcharging the vehicle's high-voltage bat-tery is taking longer than usual, check themaximum charge current settings.

Removing the charging cable

! Always disconnect the charging cablefrom the vehicle socket first. Disconnect-ing the charging cable from the stationarysocket first could damage the chargingcable connector.

The charging cable can be removed when thehigh-voltage battery is completely chargedor charging has to be interrupted.


The indicator lamp ? above vehiclesocket A goes out. Vehicle socket Aunlocks audibly.

X Disconnect the charging cable within60 seconds from vehicle socket A. Other-wise, the vehicle will relock the vehiclesocket.

X Close socket cap ;.X Close charge socket flap :.X Remove the charging cable from the mains

socket.X Stow the charging cable safely in the

charging cable bag (Y page 78).

Storing the charging cable

! The charging cable must be stowed in thecharging cable bag only to prevent it frombeing thrown around inside the vehicle.

X Stow the charging cable in the chargingcable bag.

The charging cable bag is located in the boot(Y page 145).


Dri

vin

g.

Switching on the lighting

Useful information

The driver must ensure that the light set-tings match the current weather, light andtraffic conditions.For reasons of safety, smart recommends thatyou drive with the daytime driving lights ordipped-beam headlamps switched on evenduring the daytime.A warning tone sounds if the lights are stillon when you leave the vehicle.In some countries, operation of the head-lamps varies due to legal requirements andself-imposed obligations.

: Combination switch control; Marking

Activating automatic headlamp mode

G WARNING

When the light switch is set to Ã, thedipped-beam headlamps may not beswitched on automatically if there is fog,snow or other causes of poor visibility dueto the weather conditions such as spray.There is a risk of an accident.

In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

While the engine is running, the light settingis selected automatically according to thebrightness of the ambient light. Ã con-trols the daytime driving lights, side lampsand dipped-beam headlamps. The automaticheadlamp feature is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for the vehicle's lighting at alltimes.

X Turn combination switch control : to theÃ position.

When one or more of the following occurs, thelights are switched off automatically:

RThe engine is switched off.RThe driver's door is opened.RThe vehicle is locked.RThe main-beam headlamps are not

switched on when the vehicle is station-ary.

Switching on the dipped-beam head-lamps

X Turn combination switch control : to theL position.The L indicator lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

Switching the main-beam headlampson or off

The engine must be running.

X Turn the combination switch control to theÃ or K position.

X To switch on: press the combination switchin the direction of arrow 1.

X To switch off: move the combination switchback to its original position.

The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the main-beam head-lamps are switched on.

Switching on the lighting 79

>> E

nsu

rin

g go

od v

isib

ilit

y.

Z

Using the headlamp flasher

X Pull the combination switch in the direc-tion of arrow 2.

Switching on the side lamps

X Turn combination switch control : to theT position.

Switching the foglamps and rear fog-lamp on and off

Only vehicles with front foglamps have the"Foglamps" function.

: Combination switch middle ring; Marking

Switch on the ignition and either the sidelamps or the dipped beam headlamps in orderto switch on the fog lamps.Start the engine and switch on either the sidelamps or dipped beam headlamps in order toswitch on the rear foglamp.

X To switch on or off manually: turn combi-nation switch middle ring : to the desiredmarking:RO FoglampsRR Rear foglamp

After releasing, the combination switch mid-dle ring returns automatically to the neutralposition.The foglamps and rear foglamp also switchoff automatically in the following situations:

Rthe lights are switched off.Rthe engine is switched off and the control

is in the Ã position.

Using the cornering light function

Only vehicles with the LED & Sensor packageare equipped with the cornering light func-tion.The cornering light function uses the frontfoglamps to improve the illumination of theroad in the direction in which you are turn-ing, enabling better visibility in tight bends,for example.The following conditions must be fulfilled forthe cornering light function to switch onautomatically:Rthe dipped-beam headlamps are switched

onRthe vehicle is moving at less than

40 km/hRthe turn signal is switched on or the steer-

ing wheel is turned

Adjusting the lighting

Adjusting the headlamp range

The vehicle load can affect the headlamprange. This can impair visibility, and theheadlamps can dazzle oncoming traffic.

The ignition must be switched on in order toset the headlamp range.

X Turn headlamp range adjuster : to theposition which corresponds to the load inyour vehicle.Rg: Driver's seat occupied or driver's

seat and front-passenger seat occupiedR1: Other loading

80 Adjusting the lighting>>

En

suri

ng

good

vis

ibil

ity

.

Adjusting the dipped-beam headlampsto left-hand and right-hand traffic

The symmetrical dipped-beam headlampsare required when travelling in countrieswhere vehicles are driven on the oppositeside of the road to that in which the vehicle isregistered. Unlike the asymmetrical dipped-beam headlamps, these headlamps do notdazzle oncoming traffic. Symmetricaldipped-beam headlamps provide less illu-mination to the edge of the carriageway.

X Open the service cover.X Turn the screws of both headlamps as far

as they will go:Rto X for symmetrical dipped-beam

headlampsRto W for asymmetrical dipped-beam

headlampsX Have the dipped-beam headlamp setting

checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Using the interior lighting

Switching the interior lighting on andoff

The interior lights go on when you unlock thedoors.The interior lights switch off in the followingsituations:

RA door is opened and 15 minutes havepassed.RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has been

locked and 15 seconds have passed.RAll doors are closed, the vehicle has not

been locked and 4 minutes have passed.RThe engine has been started.

The interior lighting can be activated when adoor is open. After closing the doors, theinterior lighting goes out.

X Press switch : to activate or deactivatethe left-hand reading lamp.

X Move switch ; to the desired position:Rinterior lighting switched onRinterior lighting controlled automati-

callyRinterior lighting switched off

X Press switch = to activate or deactivatethe right-hand reading lamp.

Adjusting the ambient lighting (colourdisplay)

On-board computer with colour display: theambient lighting is set in the on-board com-puter (Y page 103).

Using the windscreen wipers

Switching on the windscreen wipers

Please note

! Do not operate the windscreen wiperswhen the windscreen is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windscreen canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhen the windscreen is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the wind-screen wipers in dry weather conditions,always operate them using washer fluid.

! Vehicles with a rain sensor: if the wind-screen becomes dirty in dry weather con-ditions, the windscreen wipers may be

Using the windscreen wipers 81

>> E

nsu

rin

g go

od v

isib

ilit

y.

Z

activated inadvertently. This could dam-age the windscreen wiper blades orscratch the windscreen.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windscreen wipers in dry weather.

! Make sure that the windscreen wipers arefree of ice. Otherwise the wiper motor mayoverheat.

Wiper blades are subject to wear and tear.smart recommends replacing the wiperblades twice a year. Worn or damaged wiperblades cause smearing on the windscreen. Onvehicles with a rain sensor, malfunctions arethen possible.

Switching continuous wipe on and off

: Control for wipe frequencyu Continuous wipe, off© Automatic wipe1 Continuous wipe, slow2 Continuous wipe, fastî Wiping with washer fluid

The ignition must be switched on in order tooperate the windscreen wipers.

X Press the combination switch down or upto the desired position.

Automatic wipe (vehicles with rain sen-sor)

The rain sensor is only an aid. The driver isresponsible for ensuring good visibility atall times.

X Press the combination switch to the ©position. In automatic wipe mode, theappropriate wiping frequency is setaccording to the intensity of the rain.

X Use control : to set the wipe frequency.

Switching on intermittent wiping

X Press the combination switch to the ©position.

X Use control : to set the wipe frequency.

Wiping with washer fluid

X Pull the combination switch in the direc-tion of arrow î.

Switching the rear window wiper onand off (smart fortwo coupé)

To operate the rear window wiper, the igni-tion must be switched on.

X Turn the outer control on the combinationswitch to the desired position:R$ Rear window wiper offRè Rear window wiper onRî Wipes with washer fluid

Switching the rear window wiper onand off when in reverse gear (smartfortwo coupé)

You can switch the "Automatic rear windowwiper when reversing" setting on or off in thesmart Media-System. The rear window wiperis automatically activated for a short whilewhen the ignition is switched on, the windowwipers are switched on and reverse gear isengaged.

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle> Settings > Auto rear wipe with reverse gear.The selected setting is highlighted.

X Confirm the setting with Done.

82 Using the windscreen wipers>>

En

suri

ng

good

vis

ibil

ity

.

Folding the sun visor to the side

: Mirror cover; Bracket= Retaining strap? Vanity mirror

X Fold the sun visor down.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer ;.X Fold the sun visor to one side

Folding the sun visor to the side 83

>> E

nsu

rin

g go

od v

isib

ilit

y.

Z

Locking and unlocking the doors fromthe inside

Using the door handle to unlock thedoor

X Pull door handle :.

If the vehicle has previously been lockedwith the key, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Todisable the alarm, switch on the ignition.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they can:

Ropen doors and endanger other personsor road users

Rclimb out and be injured by the traffic

Roperate vehicle equipment and, forexample, trap themselves.

Children could also set the vehicle inmotion, for example by:


Rshifting the automatic transmission outof park position P

Rstarting the engine.


When leaving the vehicle, always take thekey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.Always keep the key out of reach of chil-dren.

X To lock: press button :.When the doors are locked, indicatorlamp ; lights up.

X To unlock: press button :.

Activating and deactivating the auto-matic locking feature

The activated automatic locking featurelocks the vehicle automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle ismoving.

X When the engine is running, press andhold button : for 5 seconds until a tonesounds.When the automatic locking function isactivated, the locking mechanism engagesaudibly when you pull away. When theautomatic locking function is deactivated,no sound occurs.

Activating the double-lock function

For United Kingdom only: the double-lockfunction prevents the doors from beingopened from the inside.

G WARNING

When the double locks are activated, thedoors can no longer be opened from theinside. People in the vehicle can no longerget out, e.g. in hazardous situations. Thereis a risk of injury.

Therefore, do not leave any people unsu-pervised in the vehicle, particularly chil-dren, elderly people or people in need of

84 Locking and unlocking the doors from the inside>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

special assistance. Do not activate thedouble lock when people are in the vehicle.

G WARNING

If persons (particularly children) areexposed to heat or cold for a prolongedperiod, there is a risk of serious or evenfatal injuries. Never leave persons (par-ticularly children) unattended in the vehi-cle.

X Press button : twice.The double-lock function is enabled.

Understanding the reversing feature

Vehicles with automatic operation: the sidewindows are equipped with an automaticreversing feature. If a solid object blocks orrestricts a side window from closing duringautomatic operation, the side window opensagain automatically. During the manualclosing process, the side window only opensagain automatically after the correspondingswitch is released. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid. The driver is respon-sible for operating the side windows safely.

G WARNING

The reversing feature does not react:

Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingers

Rwhile adjusting

This means that the reversing feature can-not prevent someone being trapped inthese situations. There is a risk of injury.

When closing, make sure that no bodyparts are in the closing area. If someonebecomes trapped, press the W button toopen the side window again.

Opening and closing the windows

Please note

G WARNING

While closing the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts ofthe body are in the closing area. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switchor press the switch to open the side windowagain.

G WARNING

Children could become trapped if theyoperate the side windows, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.


G WARNING

If you close a side window again immedi-ately after it has been blocked or reset, theside window closes with increased or max-imum force. The reversing function is thennot active. Parts of the body could be trap-ped in the closing area in the process. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.

Make sure that no parts of the body are inthe closing area. To stop the closing proc-ess, release the switch or push the switchagain to reopen the side window.

Vehicles with automatic operation: theswitches for both side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch forthe front-passenger window on the front-passenger door. The switch on the driver’sdoor takes precedence.

Opening and closing the windows 85

>> F

eeli

ng

com

fort

able

in t

he

veh

icle

inte

rior

.

Z

Opening and closing the windows

Vehicles with automatic operation: Left side window; Right side window

Vehicles without automatic operation

X To open: press the switch.X To close: pull the switch.

Opening and closing windows fully inautomatic mode

Vehicles with automatic operation:

X To open the windows fully, press theswitch beyond the point of resistance andrelease it.

X To close the windows fully, pull the switchbeyond the point of resistance and releaseit.

X To stop automatic operation, press theswitch again.

Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)

Please note

G WARNING

During opening and closing of the foldingtop or rear soft top, body parts may becometrapped for example, by the roof mechan-ical system. There is a risk of injury.

Ensure that no parts of the body are in theimmediate vicinity of moving parts duringthe closing or opening process. Release theswitch immediately if somebody becomestrapped.

! When transporting long objects in thevehicle interior, make sure that these donot press against the folding roof when itis closed.When transporting objects that extendbeyond the rear, make sure that these donot rest on the rear soft top fasteners(brackets). During loading, make sure thatobjects with sharp edges do not come intocontact with the soft top or the rear win-dow.If the rear soft top is lowered, do not dis-tribute a weight in excess of 75 kg on top ofit.Make sure that the third brake lamp is notcovered.

! Make sure that the lock openings of thesoft-top system are not blocked. Stow theside spars only in the intended stowagecompartment in the tailgate.

! Make sure that objects in the luggagecompartment are not stacked too high.They could otherwise be damaged whenthe rear soft top is opened or closed.

The procedure for removing, fitting andstowing the side bars is described below. TheQR code is a link to a video clip that demon-strates the procedure.

86 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

Opening and closing the soft top

To open or close the soft top, the ignitionmust be switched on.

X To open: press the switch to position ;until the soft top is in the desired position.Press switch ; again to fully open the softtop.

X To close: press the switch to position :until the soft top is in the desired position.

It is possible to open or close the soft topwhile driving up to the maximum designspeed. In poor weather and at high speeds, itis possible that electric locking when closingis not reliable. If this is the case you mustreduce the speed and, if necessary, press theswitch again to close the soft top.

Opening the soft top (using the key)

X Press and hold the é button on the key.

Removing the side bars

X Open the soft topX Open the doors and tailgate.

X To release: slide lever : back.The side bar is unlocked.

X Push lever : back again and remove sidebars ;.

Stowing the side bars

G WARNING

If you transport the side bars withoutsecuring them, they may be thrown aroundin the event of an accident, braking or sud-den changes in direction. There is a risk ofinjury.

Always stow the side bars in the designa-ted stowage well and close the stowagewell lid.

! When the rear soft top is lowered, the sidesupport beams could be stolen. Therefore,remove the side support beams and stowthem in the luggage compartment or closethe soft top.

! If you load the stowage space it could bedamaged.Never stow heavy objects on the stowagespace or sit on it.

Please note:

Ronly use the stowage space to store theside barsRalways place both side bars in the stowage

space

Observe the notice on the stowage space.

X Release fastening straps : on the stowagespace and guide the locking mechanism

Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio) 87

>> F

eeli

ng

com

fort

able

in t

he

veh

icle

inte

rior

.

Z

with your hand until the fastening strapsare released.

X Open cover ;.X Store the side bars as shown (observe

markings L and R on the side bars and thestowage compartment for the left and rightside bars):

: Side bar, front left; Side bar, rear left= Side bar, front right? Side bar, rear right

X Close the cover.The cover must audibly engage.

X Secure both fastening straps with ten-sioner : on rear detent ;.The red surfaces at the side must no longerbe visible. An audible click can be heardupon engaging.

X Close the tailgate.X If the tailgate does not close properly,

check if the side bars have been stored asspecified.

Fitting the side bars

G WARNING

If the side bars are incorrectly mountedthey may become loose during the journeyand endanger other road users. There is arisk of accident and injury.

Mount the side bars as described.

X Open the doors and tailgate.X Release the fastening straps on the stow-

age space and guide the locking mecha-nism with your hand until the fasteningstraps are released.

X Open the cover.X Remove the side bars.

X Insert the side bar from the stowage com-partment marked L on the left side at thefront end :.

X Press down rear end of side bar ; until itengages twice.

X Fit the side bar from the stowage compart-ment marked R on the right-hand side.

88 Using the soft top (smart fortwo cabrio)>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

Closing the stowage space without theside bars

X Move folding mechanism : in the direc-tion of the arrow.

X Close cover ;.

X Secure both fastening straps with ten-sioner : on front detent ;.The red surfaces at the side must no longerbe visible. An audible click can be heardupon engaging.

X Close the tailgate.

Fitting and removing the draught stop(smart fortwo cabrio)

Fitting the draught stop

X Open the soft top completely.X Attach recesses : of draught stop = on to

hooks ; on the roll bar.X Attach loops A on to hooks ? in the side

panelling.

Removing the draught stop

X Unhook loops A from hooks ? in the sidepanelling.

X Unhook recesses : from hooks ; on theroll bar.

Operating the climate control system

Useful information

The climate control system is only availablewhen the ignition is switched on.If the climate control system is deactivated,the air supply and circulation are switchedoff. The windows could mist up. You shouldtherefore switch off the climate control sys-tem for brief periods only.In air-recirculation mode, only the air insidethe vehicle is recirculated and no fresh air isintroduced. This is useful in a tunnel or whenthere are unpleasant odours outside the

Operating the climate control system 89

>> F

eeli

ng

com

fort

able

in t

he

veh

icle

inte

rior

.

Z

vehicle. In air-recirculation mode, the win-dows may mist up more quickly, particularlywhen the outside temperature is low. There-fore, switch on air-recirculation mode onlybriefly.The integrated filter in the climate controlsystem keeps out most particles of dust aswell as pollen. The filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. For thisreason, always observe the interval forreplacing the filter.

Operating the automatic climate con-trol system

Switching the automatic climate controlsystem on and off

The ignition must be switched on in order tooperate the blower. The engine must be run-ning in order to operate all the functions ofthe automatic climate control system.

X To switch on: press the Ã button.The indicator lamps below Ã and¿ light up.

X To switch off: press the ^ button.The indicator lamp below ^ lights up.

Setting the temperature

X Move the slider in small increments to theleft or right.

In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained at a constant level. The air dis-tribution and blower speed are regulatedautomatically.

Setting and switching the air distribu-tion off

X Press one or more of the ¯, P, Obuttons.R¯ Demister ventsRP Centre and side air ventsRO Footwell vents

Increasing the blower speed

X Press the K button.

Decreasing the blower speed

X Press the I button.

Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion mode

X Press the À button.The indicator lamp above À lights upwhen air-recirculation mode is activated.

Switching "Cooling with air dehumidifi-cation" on or off

The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function cools and dehumidifies the airinside the vehicle during warm weather.The engine must be running in order to use"Cooling with air dehumidification".

X To switch on: press the K and¿ button.The indicator lamp below ¿ lights upwhen the function is activated.

In damp weather, only switch off the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function briefly.Otherwise the windows can mist up morequickly.

Demisting the windscreen

X Press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp above ¬ lights upwhen the windscreen is being demisted.

Use this setting only until the windscreen isclear again.

90 Operating the climate control system>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

Demisting the rear window

When the rear window heating is activated,the exterior mirrors are also heated.

X Press the ¤ button.The indicator lamp above ¤ lights upwhen the rear window heating is activated.

Use this setting only until the rear window isclear again.

Drying windows that are misted up on theinside

X Press the ¿ button.X Press the Ã button.X If the windows are still misted up, press

the ¬ button.

Use this setting only until the windows areclear again.

Drying windows that are misted up on theoutside

X Switch on the windscreen wipers.X Press the ¬ button.

Use this setting only until the windows areclear again.

Setting the pre-entry climate control atdeparture time using the on-board com-puter

Only for instrument cluster with colour dis-play:The "Pre-entry climate control at departuretime" function heats or cools the vehicleinterior before the scheduled departure time.The climate control runs until approx. 10minutes after the set departure time.The vehicle must be connected to the chargerin order to activate pre-entry climate con-trol. The battery charge and the charge out-put of the high-voltage battery must be suf-ficient.If pre-entry climate control cannot be oper-ated, a display message is shown in the on-board computer.

X Call up Pre-heat/cool and charge in theon-board computer.

X Press a.X Select one of the following settings:

Rno pre-selectionThe pre-entry climate control is deacti-vated.RTwo stored departure times

X Departure time > select Activate to acti-vate the stored departure time. If Smart-Charging was selected before, this settingis also activated.

X Departure time > select Change to changethe settings of a stored departure time.

X Set the value.X Select Smart-Charging or instant charg‐ing.A display message is shown with the selec-ted settings.If Smart-Charging is selected, the high-voltage battery charges at minimum costwhile also conserving battery life.Depending on the set departure time,charging of the high-voltage battery maynot start immediately or may be interrup-ted during the charging process.

i The charging station must support thetransmission of tariff information in orderfor the optimised charging process withSmart-Charging to be possible. If thecharging station does not provide tariffinformation, set the preferred chargingtimes on the "smart control" website.

i If instant charging is selected, thehigh-voltage battery is charged regard-less of the cost information. A part of thecharging may not be conducted untilone to two hours before the departure time,in order for temperature control of thehigh-voltage battery to be carried out forthe intended departure time.

Adjusting the air vents

Please note

G WARNING

Very hot or very cold air can flow from theair vents. This could result in burns orfrostbite in the immediate vicinity of theair vents. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure that all vehicle occupantsalways maintain a sufficient distance to

Operating the climate control system 91

>> F

eeli

ng

com

fort

able

in t

he

veh

icle

inte

rior

.

Z

the air outlets. If necessary, redirect theairflow to another area of the vehicle inte-rior.

G WARNING

If you pour cleaning fluid or disinfectantinto the vehicle's ventilation system, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire.

Never spray these or other agents into theventilation system. Always have work onthe ventilation system carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Keep the following rules in mind for optimalclimate control:

RKeep the air slots between the servicecover and windscreen clear of blockages.RDo not cover the vents or ventilation grilles

in the vehicle interior.ROpen the air vents fully.

Opening and closing the air vents

X To open 1: turn the vent outwards.X To close 2: turn the vent inwards.

Directing the air vents

X Turn the air vents upwards, downwards, tothe left or to the right as desired.

Activating/deactivating the seat heat-ing and steering wheel heating

G WARNING

Repeatedly switching on the seat heatingcan cause the seat cushion, the backrestpad and parts of the steering wheel tobecome very hot. The health of personswith limited temperature sensitivity or alimited ability to react to higher tempera-tures may be affected or they may evensuffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk ofinjury.

Therefore, do not switch the seat heatingon repeatedly.

! When the seat heating is switched on, theseat surface can be damaged as a result ofobjects being placed on the seats; forexample, seat cushions, child seats andprotective covers not approved byMercedes-Benz.Ensure that there are no objects on the seatsurface when the seat heating is switchedon.

The seat heating only works when the igni-tion is switched on. Vehicles with the Winterpackage are additionally equipped with the"Steering wheel heating" : function.

X Press button =.Indicator lamp ; lights up when seatheating is activated.Vehicles with the Winter package: steeringwheel heating : is also switched on whenthe driver's seat heating is activated.

92 Activating/deactivating the seat heating and steering wheel heating>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

Using the accessories

Using the cigarette lighter

G WARNING

You can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the ciga-rette lighter.

In addition, flammable materials canignite if:

Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls

Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.

Always hold the cigarette lighter by theknob. Always make sure that the cigarettelighter is out of reach of children. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

The cigarette lighter only works when theignition is switched on.

X Press cigarette lighter :.When cigarette lighter : is hot, it pops upautomatically.

Using the ash tray

! The cup holder in the centre console isnot heat resistant. Before placing lit ciga-rettes in the ashtray, make sure that theashtray is fully inserted in the cup holder.Make sure that lit cigarettes do not fall intothe cup holder.Otherwise, the cup holder could be dam-aged.

X To open: lift up cover :.X To close: push down cover :.X To remove: pull the ashtray up and out.X To insert: insert the ashtray into the cup

holder.

Using the 12 V socket

X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

X Lift up the cover of socket :.X Connect the device.

The socket can be used for accessories up to amaximum draw of 120 W (15 A).If you use the socket for very long periodswhen the engine is switched off, the 12 Vbattery may discharge.

Fitting and removing the floormats

G WARNING

Objects in the driver's footwell mayrestrict the clearance around the pedals orblock a depressed pedal. This jeopardises

Using the accessories 93

>> F

eeli

ng

com

fort

able

in t

he

veh

icle

inte

rior

.

Z

the operating and road safety of the vehi-cle. There is a risk of an accident.

Stow all objects securely in the vehicle sothat they do not get into the driver's foot-well. Always fit the floormats securely andas prescribed in order to ensure that thereis always sufficient room for the pedals. Donot use loose floormats and do not placeseveral floormats on top of one another.

X Slide the driver's seat backwards.X To install: press securing knobs : onto

retainers ;.X To remove: release securing knobs : from

retainers ;.

94 Using the accessories>>

Fee

lin

g co

mfo

rtab

le in

th

e ve

hic

le in

teri

or.

Parking

Please note

G WARNING

When the engine is switched off, the auto-matic transmission shifts into neutralposition N. The vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.

Always shift to parking position P beforeswitching off the engine. Secure the parkedvehicle against rolling away by applyingthe parking brake.

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehi-cle or its drivetrain could be damaged.

Switching off the engine

X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position j.X Turn the key to position u in the ignition

lock and remove it.X On steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn

the front wheels towards the kerb.

Using the parking aid

Useful information

! Pay attention to people and obstacleswhen manoeuvring or parking the car. Thedriver is responsible in these situations.

The electronic parking aid gives an acousticindication of the distance between the vehi-cle and an obstacle behind it.

The parking aid uses three sensors : in therear bumper to monitor the area around thevehicle.The parking aid measures the distancebetween the vehicle and an obstacle. If theproximity to the object behind the vehicle isless than 1.20 m, a short signal is issued. Ifthe object is less than 30 cm away, a contin-uous warning tone is issued.The parking aid might not function correctlyunder the following circumstances:

Ron uneven terrainRif there are obstacles below or above the

sensor detection rangeRnear snow or objects that absorb ultra-

sonic wavesRclose to sources of strong ultrasonic radi-

ation, such as pneumatic drillsIf you engage reverse gear while the engineis running, the parking aid is activated.

Deactivating/activating the parkingaid

The parking aid is automatically activatedwhen you start the engine.

X Press the switch.When the parking aid is deactivated, the

LED on the switch lights up.

Using the reversing camera

Please note

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is nota substitute for your attention to the imme-diate surroundings. The responsibility forsafe manoeuvring and parking remains with

Using the reversing camera 95

>> P

arki

ng

and

get

tin

g ou

t.

Z

you. Make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvringarea while manoeuvring or parking.

! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged,consult a qualified specialist workshopand have the reversing camera checked.

! Objects that are not at ground levelappear further away than they actuallyare, for example:

Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behindRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe tail-end of a lorryRslanted postsOnly use the image from the reversingcamera as a guide. You may otherwisedamage your vehicle and/or the object.

Understanding the reverse camerafunctions

! Pay attention to people and obstacleswhen manoeuvring or parking the car. Thedriver is responsible in these situations.

! If the rear of your vehicle is damaged,consult a qualified specialist workshopand have the reversing camera checked.

The reversing camera is a visual parking andmanoeuvring aid. It shows the area behindyour vehicle with guide lines in the smartMedia-System display.

Reversing camera : is located above thelicence plate in the tailgate.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image in the smart Media-System dis-play.

The reversing camera might show a distortedview of obstacles or show them incorrectly ornot at all if:

Rthe obstacle is very close to the rearbumperRthe obstacle is underneath the rear

bumperRthe obstacle is close to the tailgate handleRthe reversing camera is covered by addi-

tional accessories, e.g. a bicycle rackThe function of the reversing camera mightbe limited:

Rif the tailgate is openRif there is snow or heavy rainRin the darkRif a very bright light outshines the cameraRif there is fluorescent light, e.g. from flu-

orescent lamps or LED lightingRif there is a rapid change of temperatureRif the camera lens is dirty

Guide lines in the display

Useful information

! Objects that are not at ground levelappear further away than they actuallyare, for example:

Rthe bumper of the vehicle parked behindRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitchRthe tail-end of a lorryRslanted postsOnly use the image from the reversingcamera as a guide. You may otherwisedamage your vehicle and/or the object.

Guide lines in different colours show the dis-tance of obstacles from the rear of the vehi-cle. Static guide lines do not change when thesteering wheel is turned. Dynamic guidelines change depending on the position ofthe steering wheel.

96 Using the reversing camera>>

Par

kin

g an

d g

etti

ng

out.

: Static: vehicle width including exteriormirrors

; Green, static: approx. 1.50 m= Yellow, static: approx. 0.7 m? Red, static: approx. 0.3 mA Blue, dynamic: vehicle width including

exterior mirrors

The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

Activating the reversing camera

The ignition must be switched on to use thereversing camera.

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle> Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera view settings > Rear camera view.

X Confirm with Done.X Engage reverse gear.

The area behind the vehicle is shown withguide lines in the smart Media-Systemdisplay.

Switching off the reversing camera

After driving forwards briefly, the reversingcamera will turn itself off.

Adjusting the reversing camera set-tings

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle> Settings > Rear camera > Rear camera view settings.

X To select the desired settings:

RSwitch Rear camera view on or off.RSwitch Static guidelines on or off.RSwitch Dynamic guidelines on or off.

X Confirm with Done.

Adjusting reversing camera displaysettings

X In the smart Media-System, select Vehicle> Settings > Rear camera > Image settings.

X Adjust the values for Brightness, Satura‐tion and Contrast.

X Confirm the display settings with Done.

Locking the vehicle

G WARNING

If children are left unsupervised in thevehicle, they could:

Ropen doors, thereby endangering otherpersons or road users

Rget out and be struck by oncoming traffic

Roperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for example

In addition, the children could also set thevehicle in motion by, for example:


Rshifting the transmission out of parkposition P

Rstarting the vehicle's drive system


When leaving the vehicle, always take thekey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children and animals unattended inthe vehicle. Keep the keys out of the reachof children.

X Press the & button on the key.The turn signals flash twice.

Locking the vehicle 97

>> P

arki

ng

and

get

tin

g ou

t.

Z

Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system

Useful information

The immobiliser prevents the vehicle frombeing started without the correct key. It isswitched on and off automatically.The anti-theft alarm system triggers a visualand audible alarm if a door, the tailgate or theservice cover is opened.The alarm is not switched off, even if, forexample, you close the open door that hastriggered it.

Priming

X Close the doors.X Close the tailgate.X Close the service cover.X Press the & button on the key. The

alarm system is primed after approx-imately 30 seconds.

Deactivating and switching off thealarm


98 Priming and deactivating the anti-theft alarm system>>

Par

kin

g an

d g

etti

ng

out.

Overview of the on-board computer

Please note

G WARNING

If you operate information and communi-cation equipment integrated in the vehiclewhen driving, you could be distracted fromthe traffic situation. This could also causeyou to lose control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.


G WARNING

If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognise func-tion restrictions relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have the vehiclechecked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, you must park the vehicle safely assoon as possible. Consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Display messages and displays in theinstrument cluster are only shown for cer-tain systems. Vehicle owners and drivers areresponsible for ensuring that the vehicle isoperating safely. A vehicle which is not oper-ating safely can cause an accident.The display shows the outside temperatureon the far right in the header. Drivers mustpay special attention to road conditionswhen temperatures are around freezingpoint. Changes in the outside temperatureare displayed after a short delay.After opening the door, the on-board com-puter is activated for approximately15 minutes. To permanently activate the on-board computer, the ignition must beswitched on.

Monochrome display overview

: Time; Transmission display= Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp? Outside temperature display and black

ice warning ÒA Trip meter, remaining range, service dis-

playB Tyre pressure monitorC eco score displayD Brake lamp failure warning lampE Total distance recorderF Cruise control, limiter

Colour display overview

: Time; Lane Keeping Assist indicator lamp= Digital speedometer? Outside temperature display with black

ice warning ÒA Display field for display messages,

menus and listsB Remaining rangeC ECO mode, radar-based recuperation

Overview of the on-board computer 99

>> O

per

atin

g th

e on

-boa

rd c

omp

ute

r.

Z

D Transmission displayE Cruise control, limiter

Calling up displays

Calling up displays (monochrome dis-play)

: Monochrome display; Buttons on the multifunction lever

X To scroll forward at menu level, brieflypress the ´ button on multifunctionlever.

X To directly call up the trip meter, press andhold the ´ button on multifunctionlever.

X Press and hold a on the multifunctionlever to reset the values.

The following displays can be called up oneafter another:

Rtrip meterRremaining rangeRservice due dateRsetting the timeRactivating/deactivating Active Brake

AssistRrestarting the tyre pressure monitor

Calling up displays (colour display)

Calling up displays

: Colour display; Left control panel

X Briefly press 9 or : on left controlpanel ;, to scroll forwards or backwards.

X Press and hold 9 or : on left controlpanel ;, to directly call up the Distancedisplay.

The following displays can be called up oneafter another:

RDistanceRTrip computer from startRTrip computer from resetReco score from startRFuel consumption bar chartREnergy flowRPre-heat/cool and chargeRMessages and serviceRSettingsRDigital speedometer

100 Calling up displays>>

Op

erat

ing

the

on-b

oard

com

pu

ter.

Distance display

: Trip meter; Total distance recorder

Trip computer display

: Elapsed time; Distance= Average speed? Average energy consumption

The data in the from start menu refers to thestart of the journey, whilst the data in thefrom reset menu refers to the last time thesubmenu was reset.If the ignition remains switched off for lon-ger than four hours, the from start values inthe instrument cluster are reset. The ecoscore display is also reset automatically.

eco score display

The eco score display provides feedback onhow economical the driver's driving behav-iour is (Y page 64).If the ignition remains switched off for lon-ger than four hours, the eco score display willbe automatically reset.

When the eco score display is reset, the from start trip computer in the smart Media-Sys-tem and the eco score display are also resetin the smart Media-System.

Fuel consumption bar chart display

: Energy consumption; Recuperation

The display shows the average energy con-sumption and recuperation over the previous15 minutes.

Energy flow display

: Total output; Output for electrical consumers

The total output shows the driver the sum ofthe energy currently flowing from the bat-tery. The colour of the battery shows whetherenergy is being consumed or recuperated:RBattery symbol is orange: energy is being

consumed.RBattery symbol is green: energy is being

recuperated.RBattery symbol is grey: energy consump-

tion and recuperation are equal or both at0 kW.

The output for electrical consumers showsthe driver what output is needed to operateelectrical consumers, e.g. climate controlsystems or the radio. If the value is kept aslow as possible, a greater range is achieved.

Calling up displays 101

>> O

per

atin

g th

e on

-boa

rd c

omp

ute

r.

Z

Pre-entry climate control and chargingdisplay

: Time of the full charge; Charge status of the battery= Departure time? Smart-ChargingA Charge current and charge output

An arrow underneath the battery indicatesthe charge status of the battery at the depar-ture time. The charge status and the time ofcomplete charge are only predicted approx-imately. The time of complete charge cannotbe displayed when Smart-Charging is acti-vated.Information on the "Pre-entry climate con-trol at departure time" function (Y page 91).

Messages and service display

: Message memory; Next service due date

The display shows the number of displaymessages in the message memory and thenext service due date.¯ indicates a minor service. ° indi-cates a major service.To show the display messages, the ignitionmust be switched on.

X Press a to scroll through the displaymessages.

Current information on the type of servicecan be obtained at a smart centre or a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Digital speedometer display

The display shows the digital speedometer.The digital speedometer in the header is hid-den.United Kingdom only: the digital speedome-ter in the header continues to be displayed.

Setting values

Setting values (monochrome display)

Setting the time

X Press ́ repeatedly until ° is shownnext to the time.

X Press a until the hour display flashes.X Set values.

Deactivating or activating Active BrakeAssist

X Press ´ several times until and° are displayed.

X Press a until on or OFF appears below

.The ^ indicator lamp lights up whenActive Brake Assist is deactivated.

Resetting values

The trip meter display and eco score displaycan be reset.

X Scroll to the desired display.X Press a for three seconds.

Setting values (colour display)

Setting values

102 Setting values>>

Op

erat

ing

the

on-b

oard

com

pu

ter.

X Press 9 or : to scroll to Settings.X Press 9 or : to scroll to the desired

menu.X Press 9 or : to set the desired data.X Press a to confirm.

Resetting values

X Press a.X Select yes and press a to confirm.

Setting the time

X Select Settings > Time > Set the time.X Set values.

Vehicles with smart Media-System: thetime and time format are set in the smartMedia-System.

Setting the time format

X Select Settings > Time > 12/24 Time for‐mat.

X Set the value

Adjusting the instrument cluster light-ing

X Select Settings > Display > Display/switch brightness.

X Set the value

Displaying the digital speedometer in theheader

X Select Settings > Display > Digital speedometer.

X Select the Disp. addit. dig. speedo.function.The digital speedometer is displayed inthe header.

England only: the digital speedometer in theheader cannot be hidden.

Setting the unit for speed in the digitalspeedometer

X Select Settings > Display> Digital speedometer > Unit.

X Set the valueThe following values are set:

RDigital speedometer displayRDigital speedometer in the headerEngland only: only the display unit of thedigital speedometer is set.

Setting the unit of measurement for dis-tance

X Select Settings > Display > Units of distance.

X Set the value

Setting the temperature unit

X Select Settings > Display > Units of temperature.

X Set the value

Switching radar-based recuperation offand on

To switch on radar-based recuperation, theconditions for activation must be fulfilledand the ignition must be switched on.

X Select Settings > Radar assist.recuper‐ation > on or off.

Information on radar-based recuperation(Y page 62).

Deactivating or activating Active BrakeAssist

The ignition must be switched on in order toset Active Brake Assist.

X Select Settings > Active Brake Assist >on or off.

Information on Active Brake Assist(Y page 51).

Starting the tyre pressure monitor

X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitor.

Information on the tyre pressure monitor(Y page 154).

Switching ambient lighting on/off

X Select Settings > Ambient lighting > On.

Setting values 103

>> O

per

atin

g th

e on

-boa

rd c

omp

ute

r.

Z

Setting the brightness of the ambientlighting

X Select Settings > Ambient lighting >Brightness.

X Set the value

Setting the language

X Select Settings > Language (Language).X Set the value

104 Setting values>>

Op

erat

ing

the

on-b

oard

com

pu

ter.

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

smart Audio-System overview

G WARNING



You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently driv-ing when operating the smart Audio-System.

: Number keys 1 - 6; C Previous station or track= USB1 port and bracket connection for

mobile phone with smart cross connectapp

? D Next station or trackA % Goes back one menu level higherB Control for menu selection and station

list, 9 buttonC USB2 portDÃ Telephone menu to accept or reject

callsEª System settingsF 8 MuteG Õ Plays back media from external data

carriers

H $ Switches on the radio and selectsthe waveband.

I External audio equipment (AUX connec-tion)

J Volume control, Ü buttonK F Sets the radio text

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System

X To switch on or off: press Ü.X To scroll through menus: turn control B.X To select menu options: turn control B

and press the 9 button.X To navigate to the next-highest folder:

press the % button.X To set values: turn control B and press the

9 button.X To increase or decrease the volume: turn

control J.

Using external devices

Useful information

You can connect the following external devi-ces:

RUSB devices, iPods® and MP3 players (USBport)RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)RBluetooth® devices, such as mobile phonesExternal devices can be charged at USB ports= and C when the ignition is switched on. Itis better to use USB port = for charging as itsupplies a higher charge current. To chargean external device remove the cover on USBport =.

Using the smartphone bracket

Useful information

i Operating smartphones in the smart-phone bracket is permitted exclusively inconnection with the smart cross connectapp.

Operating and setting the smart Audio-System 105

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Au

dio

-Sy

stem

.

Z

The smartphone bracket keeps your mobilephone secured in the vehicle. In order to usethe smart cross connect app, rotate themobile phone to landscape mode.You can use the USB port behind the smart-phone bracket on the left to charge yourmobile phone during the journey. The mobilephone can be charged when the ignition isswitched on.The smartphone bracket is suitable formobile phones with the following dimen-sions:

Rthickness: 6 – 10 mmRwidth: 55 – 82 mmRlength: 120 – 162 mmFurther information is available from anysmart centre.

Removing and fastening the cover of theUSB1 port

X To remove: turn the cover anti-clockwiseusing handle :.

X Press on marking ;.X Remove the cover.X To secure: place the cover in position ;.X Turn the cover clockwise using handle :.

Fitting the smartphone bracket

X Remove the cover from the USB1 port.X Connect the smartphone bracket to USB1

and turn the locking mechanism clock-wise.

Inserting and removing the mobile phone

X To insert: press the right-hand raised but-ton on the bottom edge of the smartphonebracket.The upper tensioning arm opens.

X If necessary, press the left-hand button onthe bottom edge of the smartphonebracket.The tensioning arms on the side open.

X Set the mobile phone in the smartphonebracket.

X If necessary, press the tensioning arms onthe side together to set them to the size ofthe mobile phone.

X Press down the upper tensioning arms tosecure the mobile phone.

X To remove: press the right-hand raisedbutton on the bottom edge of the smart-phone bracket.The upper tensioning arm opens.

X Remove the mobile phone from the smart-phone bracket.

Operating the smart Audio-System viathe mobile phone

You can use the smart cross connect app foriOS and Android to operate the smart Audio-System via a mobile phone.

X Download the smart cross connect appfrom the App Store® (iOS) or Google Play™(Android) and install it on the mobilephone.

X Connect the mobile phone with the smartAudio-System via Bluetooth®.

X Insert the mobile phone into the bracket.

Further information about operating thesmart Audio-System via mobile phone can befound in the smart cross connect app user'sguide.

Adjusting the system settings

Setting the system language

X Press the ª button.X Select Language.

The list of languages appears.X Select the language.

106 Operating and setting the smart Audio-System>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t A

ud

io-S

yst

em.

Switching the time on or off

X Press the ª button.X Select Clock.X Select ON or OFF.

Setting the time

X Press the ª button.X Select Clock.X Select Set Time.X Set the time.


X Press the ª button.X Select Clock.X Select Format.X Choose one of the following time formats:RAm/PmR24hr

Adjusting the audio settings

Adjusting the sound

X Press the ª button.X Select Audio.X Select Sound.X Select the desired sound settings:RBass: adjusts the bass.RTreble: adjusts the treble.RBal.: adjusts the surround sound (bal-

ance) to left or right.

Switching the bass boost on or off (vehi-cles without JBL sound system)

X Press the ª button.X Select Audio.X Select Bass Boost.X Select ON or OFF.

Resetting audio settings

X Press the ª button.X Select Audio.

X Select Audio Default.X Select Yes .

Adjusting the volume to the vehiclespeed (vehicles without JBL sound sys-tem)

X Press the ª button.X Select Audio.X Select Speed Vol..X Select the desired level.

The higher the level, the higher the volumewill be at increasing road speeds.

Listening to the radio

Switching on the radio

X Press the Ü button.X Press the $ button.

The smart Audio-System receives datatransmitted via the Radio Data System (RDS).

Selecting a waveband

X Press the $ button repeatedly until thedesired waveband appears.

If available, you can switch between the fol-lowing wavebands:

RFM1RFM2RDR1 (digital radio)RDR2 (digital radio)RAM

Selecting stations manually

FM and AM waveband

X Press the D or C button to set thedesired frequency.

Digital radio frequency range

X To select the desired station, press theD or C button.

Listening to the radio 107

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Au

dio

-Sy

stem

.

Z

Setting a station from the station list

X Press a in radio mode.The station list appears.

X Select a station.X Press a to confirm.

Updating the station list

X Press the $ button until you hear atone.

Storing a station

X Select a waveband.X Set the station.X Press a number key 1 to 6 until you hear

a tone.The station set for this waveband will besaved at the button you have pressed.

Selecting a stored station

X Select a waveband.X Press a number key for the stored station.

Switching traffic announcementson/off

X Press the ª button.X Select Radio.X Select TA.X Select ON or OFF.

Interrupting a traffic announcement

X During a traffic announcement, brieflypress %.

Displaying radio text in FM radio

X Press the F button.If radio text is available, it will be dis-played.

Digital radio (if available)

Information on DAB

i Any electronic devices taken into thevehicle may seriously impair radio andDAB radio reception.

Digital radio or DAB (Digital Audio Broad-casting) is a digital transmission standardoptimally designed for the mobile receptionof radio transmissions. Several programmesare combined into so-called ensembles andtransmitted on a single frequency. Some sta-tions only transmit programmes at certaintimes. If you have selected a programme thathas subsequently been removed from theensemble, it will no longer be received. Youwill continue to receive the other pro-grammes in the ensemble. Select either a dif-ferent programme or a different ensemble.

i DAB cannot be received everywhere inEurope.

Displaying radio text

This function provides additional datatransmitted in the DAB waveband (DR1 andDR2). Besides displaying the artist and tracknames, information on the current pro-gramme may also be available.

X Press the F button.X Select Radio text.

The î dot shows that radio text is acti-vated.

Setting alerts

If this function is activated, certain pro-gramme categories allow another broadcastto interrupt the current audio playback.Numerous categories can be selected, such asnews, business news, sports news etc.A prerequisite for the reception is thatbroadcasters process the relevant informa-tion. This function is only available in cer-tain countries.

X Call up the setup menu (Y page 106).X Radio > DR Interrupt > Select the desired

category.The î dot shows the active settings.

i Several categories can be selected.Repeat the procedure if necessary.

108 Listening to the radio>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t A

ud

io-S

yst

em.

Displaying the EPG

EPG (Electronic Program Guide) is availablein the DAB waveband (DR1 and DR2).If the station supports EPG, you can use theEPG (Electronic Programme Guide) to displaythe current and the following two radio pro-grammes. At the very least, the programmeoverview contains the name, time and lengthof each programme.

X Press the F button.X Select EPG.X Select the desired station.

Switching on Intellitext™

If the station supports Intellitext™, you canhave additional information displayed, suchas news, headlines, business news, sportsnews etc. A prerequisite for the reception isthat broadcasters process the relevant infor-mation. Intellitext™ is only available in cer-tain countries.

X Press the F button.X Select Intellitext.

Using a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Useful information

The Bluetooth®-capable mobile phone mustbe compatible with the smart Audio-System.Overview of compatible mobile phones:http://www.smart.com/connect.

To make a call, Bluetooth® must be activatedon the mobile phone and the smart Audio-System.

Once outside the Bluetooth® reception range,the connection is terminated automatically.To clearly identify a mobile phone, changethe device name (see the manufacturer'soperating instructions).

Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phone

X Activate Bluetooth® on the mobile phone(see the manufacturer's operating instruc-tions).

X Search for devices.

Switching on the Bluetooth® function ofthe smart Audio-System

X Press the Ã button.X Turn control B to Bluetooth and confirm

with 9.X Turn control B to ON and confirm with 9.

The î dot shows the active setting.

Authorising a mobile phone on the smartAudio-System

X Press the Ã button.X Select Scan devices.

The system searches for available mobilephones and displays them in a list.

X Select the mobile phone and confirm with9.

X Do one of the following:Rif a code appears in the smart Audio-

System display and on the mobile phone,confirm it on the mobile phoneRif the code 0000 appears in the smart

Audio-System display, enter it and con-firm it on the mobile phone

A maximum of five mobile phones can beauthorised. However, only one authorisedmobile phone can be connected with Blue-tooth® at a time.

Loading and updating the phone book

X Press the Ã button.X Select Settings > PB download.X If necessary, accept the access confirma-

tion on the mobile phone.

If the mobile phone supports the Bluetooth®

PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) profile, thephone book and call lists will be transferredafter you connect.

Removing a mobile phone from the list(de-authorising)

X Press the Ã button.X Select Del. device.

Authorised mobile phones are displayed.X Select the mobile phone to be removed.X Select YES.

Using a mobile phone 109

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Au

dio

-Sy

stem

.

Z

After de-authorisation, the Bluetooth® con-nection to the mobile phone is no longerestablished automatically.

Connecting another authorised mobilephone

X Activating Bluetooth® on a mobile phoneX Press the Ã button.X Select Sel. device.

All authorised mobile phones are dis-played. The currently connected mobilephone is indicated by a dot.

X Select the desired mobile phone from thelist.

Setting the sound

Adjusting the call volume

X Press the Ã button.X Select Settings > Volume > Call.X Select the setting.

Switching the smart Audio-System ring-tone on and off

X Press the Ã button.X Select Settings > Ringtone.X To switch on: select Car.X To switch off: select Phone.

Adjusting the ringtone volume

X Press the Ã button.X Select Settings > Volume > Ring.X Select the setting.

Telephone operation

Calling a contact from the phone book

To call a contact in the telephone book, themobile phone telephone book first has to beimported into the smart Audio-System.

X Press the Ã button.X Select Telephone book.X Select the contact.

The details for the contact are displayed.

X Dial the selected phone number.X Press the 9 button.

Dialling a number

X Press the Ã button.X Select Dial Number.

An input screen appears.X Enter the number.X Press the 9 button.X Select ;.

Using call lists to call contacts

To call a contact in a call list, the mobilephone telephone book first has to be impor-ted into the smart Audio-System.

X Press the Ã button.X Select Call lists.X Select Dialled, Received or Missed.X Select an entry from the list.

Calling the last number dialled

X Press and hold the Ã button until thecall is established.

Accepting a call

X Press the Ã button.

Rejecting a call

X Press and hold the Ã button until thecall is rejected.

Holding and continuing a call

X To place a call on hold: select Â.X To continue the call: press the 9 button.

Transferring a call to the mobile phone

X Select z.X To transfer the call back to the smart

Audio-System: press 9.

110 Using a mobile phone>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t A

ud

io-S

yst

em.

Entering numbers or characters during acall

X Select #123.X Enter numbers or characters.

Ending a call

X Press the 9 button.

Using voice control for the mobilephone

Useful information

The voice control of the connected mobilephone can be used (see manufacturer's oper-ating instructions). Not all voice controlservices are supported by the smart Audio-System.Voice control must be activated in the set-tings menu of the mobile phone.

Starting voice control for the mobilephone

X Connect the mobile phone with the smartAudio-System via Bluetooth®.

X Press the button on the steeringwheel.A message appears in the display of thesmart Audio-System and a tone sounds.Voice control for the mobile phone isactive.

X Say a command.

Ending voice control for the mobile phone

X Press the button on the steeringwheel.or

X Press the 9 button.Voice control for the mobile phone isended.

Operating external data storage media

Useful information

You can switch between the following mediasources, depending on the type of externaldata carrier connected:

RUSB 1 or iPod 1RUSB 2 or iPod 2RAUX (external audio equipment)RBT Audio (with Bluetooth® connected

device, such as a mobile phone)

Selecting external data carriers

X Press the Õ button repeatedly until thedesired media source appears in the dis-play.

Operating a USB device or iPod®

Connecting a device

X Connect the device to the USB port.The device is activated automatically andthe first track is played.

Selecting a track

X In USB mode, press the 9 button.Available tracks or folders are displayed.

X Turn control B.X Press 9 to confirm.

Rapid search

X Press the 9 button.An entry field appears.

X To enter characters, turn control B andpress the 9 button.

Skipping to the next or previous track

X Press the D or C button briefly toskip to the next track or press longer forrapid scrolling.

Operating external data storage media 111

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Au

dio

-Sy

stem

.

Z

Switching random track sequence on/off

X Press the C button.

Switching the repeat function on/off

X Press the number key.

Selecting a track from a category with aniPod® connected

X Press the 9 button.X Select the category from a list.

Different categories, such as playlists,artists or albums, can be selected, depend-ing on the connected device.

Displaying metadata

X Press the F button repeatedly until thedesired metadata is displayed.

Operating external audio equipment(AUX)

Connecting a device

X Connect the device to the AUX jack.Use the Õ button to access the media ona connected AUX device.

Adjusting the volume of external audioequipment

X Press the ª button.X Select Audio.X Select AUX In.X Select one of the following options for the

volume:RLowRMediumRHigh

Bluetooth® device operation

Connecting a device

X Connect a Bluetooth® audio device thesame way you connect a mobile phone withBluetooth®.

Skipping to the next or previous track

X Press the D or C button briefly toskip to the next track or press longer forrapid scrolling.

Displaying metadata

X Press the F button repeatedly until thedesired metadata is displayed.

112 Operating external data storage media>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t A

ud

io-S

yst

em.

Operating and setting up the smartMedia-System

Operating the smart Media-System

Please note

Some functions are restricted while driving.

Controls

: Switches voice control system onand off, accepts and ends a phone call

; W Increases the volume= X Reduces the volume? smart Media-System display

Voice control system

The following functions are possible usingthe voice control system of the smart Media-System:

Renter a destination for navigationRmake a callRstart an application

Controls on the smart Media-System

: Previous station or track and fast rewind; Mute= Next station or track and fast forward? Switches to the home screenA Ü On/off button and volume controlB Touchscreen

Ports on the centre console

: Port for external audio equipment (AUX); USB port= SD card slot

Some devices, for example mobile phones orUSB drives, connect with the smart Media-System via USB port ;. External deviceswith 5 V (1 A) can be charged on USB port ;when the ignition is switched on.

Operating and setting up the smart Media-System 113

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Overview of home screen

: Radio station, media track; Number of messages in the message

memory= Status of the mobile phone and field

strength of the mobile phone network? Outside temperatureA TimeB MapC Next navigation manoeuvreD Context menuE Distance to the destination and estima-

ted time of arrivalF Favourites menuG Main menuH Telephone menu, status of the mobile

phone and field strength of the mobilephone network

X To call up a function, tap on an area on thehome page or on a symbol:R:: to switch to radio or media applicationR;: to call up message memoryR=: to switch to telephone applicationR?: to call up weather forecast for current

locationRA: to display time and temperature in full

screen or call up time settingsRB: to switch to full screen navigation viewRD: to change language, change home

page, remove SD card or switch off displayRF: to view, call up or change FavouritesRG: to call up main menuRH: to switch to telephone application

i The home screen can be set to display theenergy flow.

If the home page is set so as to display the ecoscore, you can switch to the eco score appli-cation by tapping on the area.When Android Auto™ or MirrorLink™ isactive, another symbol is displayed on thehome page. You can switch to the relevantsmartphone screen application by tappingon the symbol.

Switching the smart Media-System onand off

To switch on automaticallyX Start the engine.

To switch off automaticallyX Switch off the ignition and open the door.

To switch on and off manuallyX Press the Ü button.

To restartX Press the Ü button.

The smart Media-System shuts down andrestarts.

i The restart can take several minutes.During the restart, the audio volume can-not be adjusted.

Scrolling through a menu or list on thetouchscreen

X Touch the touchscreen with your finger.X Swipe up, down, left or right.

The selection on the display will then movein the respective direction.

Selecting items on the touchscreen

X Tap on a menu, an option or an applicationwith one finger.The menu, the option or the application islaunched.

114 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Controlling media playback on thetouchscreen

X Swipe to the left.The next media item is played or dis-played, e.g. the next track or station.

X Swipe to the right.Playback is restarted or the previousmedia item is played or displayed, e.g. theprevious track.

Media playback can be controlled in the fol-lowing playback modes:

RRadio modeRMusic and audio playbackRImage playbackRVideo playback

Calling up menus

X Select Menu on the home screen.Select one of the following submenus:RMultimedia

Radio and media playbackRNavigation

Navigation systemRTelephone

Mobile phone functionsRVehicle

Reversing camera, eco score, energyflow and consumption detailsRServices

Apps and TomTom ServicesRSystem

General systems settings

Confirming settings

X Select Done.Settings are accepted.

Switching off the display

X Select home page > W > Switch off display.

Adjusting the system settings

Adjusting the display

Setting the daytime brightnessX Select System > Display .X Move the Daytime brightness control to

the left or right.

Setting the night time brightnessX Select System > Display.X Move the Nighttime brightness control

to the left or right.

Activating automatic switching betweenday and night modeX Select System > Display > Automatic day/night mode.

Displaying day mode constantlyX Select System > Display .X Remove the tick for Automatic day/night mode and Force night mode.

Displaying night mode constantlyX Select System > Display > Force night mode

Setting the system language

X Select System > Language.A list of available languages is displayed.

X Select the desired language.

i The language of the spoken navigationannouncement can be selected independ-ently of the system language.

Changing the on-screen keyboard

X Select System > Keyboards.X Select one of the following keyboard lay-

outs:RLatinRGreekRCyrillic

For the Latin keyboard layout, it is possibleto choose between the ABCD, QWERTY, AZERTYand QWERTZ layouts.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Selecting the home screen display

Different displays are available for the homepage which display up-to-date informationabout the applications in the smart Media-System.

X Select System > Home page.A selection of home screen displaysappears.

X Select the desired display.

Resetting to factory settings

X Select System > Factory settings.X Confirm with Yes.

All settings changed in the system returnto the default values. All destinations,routes and favourites will be deleted.

Setting the time manually

X Select System > Clock > Set time.X Change the minutes and hours of the time

shown.

Activating automatic time adjustment

X Select System > Clock > Set time > Auto‐matic time adjustment.


X Select System > Clock > Time format.X Choose one of the following time formats:R18:00R6:00 PMR6:00

Displaying status and information

X Select System > Status & Information.X Select one of the following information

options:RVersion information

Software and hardware of the Media-SystemRGPS status

Current GPS signal strengthRNetwork status

Signal strength of the data connectionRLicences

For free and open-source software usedRCopyright

For text in the TomTom software used.

Adjusting the audio settings

Setting the volume

X Select System > Sound > Volumes.X Select one of the following volume set-

tings:RMain volume

For the whole systemRHands-free

For the hands-free systemRRingtone

Ring tone volumeRNavigation

Volume for the whole navigation systemRComputer voice

Volume of the computer-generated voiceRApp events

Volume of events triggered by appsX Set the desired volume.

Adjusting the volume to the vehiclespeed (vehicles without JBL sound sys-tem)

The speed-dependent volume adjustmentfunction adapts the volume to the currentvehicle speed.

X Select System > Sound > Speed dependency.X Move the Speed dependency control to the

left or right.The higher the value, the more the volumeincreases with the speed of the vehicle.

Volume adjustment is not set using the con-trol but automatically.

Adjusting surround sound (balance)

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >Balance > Manual.

X Move the control to the desired position.X Confirm with Done.

116 Operating and setting up the smart Media-System>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Adjusting the bass and treble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >Bass/Treble > Manual.

X Use the control to adjust the bass and tre-ble separately.

Setting a neutral sound for the bass andtreble

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Sound >Bass/Treble > Neutral.Audio is played without increasing thebass or treble.

Activating and deactivating arkamys®

bass boost (vehicles without JBL soundsystem)

The arkamys® bass boost setting emphasisesthe bass during playback.

X Select Multimedia > Settings > arkamys bass boost.

Manual activation of arkamys® bass boost onmodels with a JBL sound system is not pos-sible. Activation functions automatically.

Setting the volume for warning tones

X Select System > Sound > Warnings.X Move the control to the left or right.

Enabling warning tones when the displayis switched off

X Select System > Sound > Warnings > Sound warning tones when display turned off.

Creating and deleting favourites

Creating favourites

: Preset; Navigation= Radio? TelephoneA ServicesB Context menu

Frequently used settings such as phone con-tacts and radio stations can be stored asfavourites. Six favourites can be stored foreach of the following categories:

RNavigationRRadioRTelephoneRServicesX Select Favourites on the home screen.X Select category.X Select the next empty memory position.

A list of possible favourites appears.X Select Favourites.

Deleting favourites

X Select Favourites on the home screen.X Select W > Remove a Favourite.X Perform one of the following steps:RSelect the favourite to be removed and

press Delete to confirm.RTo delete all favourites, select Remove all Favourites.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Listening to the radio

Switching on the radio

X Select Multimedia > Radio.

Display modes

Useful information

In radio mode there are three different dis-play modes, in which various settings can bemade:

R“List” display mode (FM and digital radio)R“Frequency” display mode (AM and FM

radio)R“Presets” display mode

“List” display mode (FM and digital radio)

: Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio)and preset group (FM/DAB)

; Selects previous station= Selects next station? Context menuA Selects “frequency” display modeB “List” display modeC Selects “Presets” display modeD Station currently playing

“Frequency” display mode (AM and FMradio)

: Selects the waveband (AM/FM radio) andpreset group (FM)

; Increases or decreases the frequency insmall increments

= Station search, forwards or backwards? Context menuA Adjusts the frequency manuallyB Station currently playing

“Presets” display mode

: Selects the waveband (AM/FM/DAB radio)and preset group (FM/DAB)

; Stored station= Context menu? Station currently playing

Selecting a station

“List” display mode

X Swipe up or down in the station listX Tap on the desired station.

118 Listening to the radio>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

“Frequency” display mode (AM and FMradio)

X Slide control on the waveband left or right

Starting a station search

X Select C or D in the “frequency” dis-play mode

Storing a station

X Set the station.X Select W > Save as preset.

Up to six stations can be stored for eachwaveband.

Displaying radio text

Radio text contains information such as cur-rent track or latest news.

X Select W > Display radio text.

Displaying digital radio services

X Select W > Digital radio services.X Select one of the following digital radio

services:REPG (Electronic Programme Guide)

Programme schedule for the station cur-rently playingRIntellitext

Programme information and programmeschedule for the station currently play-ingRSlide show

Displays images to accompany the cur-rent broadcast

Other radio settings

Searching for alternative frequencieswith the best possible reception quality

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > AF (Alternative frequency).

Receiving traffic reports (i-Traffic)

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i-Traffic (Traffic programme).

Displaying the programme type (e.g.classical)

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >PTY (Programme type).

Switching to the corresponding FM sta-tion when digital radio reception is poor

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >Simulcast.

Displaying information on certain cate-gories (i-Announcement, digital radioonly)

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio > i-Announcement.

X Select category of i-Announcements.

Updating the station list

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Radio >Update radio list.

Calling up electric drive displays

Calling up the energy flow display

X Select Menu > Vehicle > electric drive >Energy flow.

The Energy flow display shows the flow ofenergy in the vehicle.The colour of the energy flow indicates thefollowing:

RGreen colouring: energy is being recuper-atedROrange colouring: the drive is consuming

energyRYellow colouring and an illustration of the

consumers: electrical consumers are con-suming energyRGrey colouring: no energy is being recu-

perated or consumed

Calling up electric drive displays 119

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Calling up the detailed consumptiondisplay

X Select Menu > Vehicle > electric drive >Consumption details.

The Consumption details display shows theenergy consumption of the drive and elec-trical consumers as well as the energy recu-perated during the previous 15 minutes. Thedisplay also shows the total consumption ofthe drive and electrical consumers as well asthe total amount of energy recuperated dur-ing the current journey.The Consumption details display is reseteach time the engine is switched on.

Using a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Please note

G WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the vehicleelectronics if they are manipulated or ret-rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardisethe operating safety of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical andelectronic components carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectlyin the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi-ation can interfere with the vehicle elec-tronics, for example if:

Rthe two-way radio is not connected to anexterior aerial

Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun-ted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardise the operating safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit-ted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating two-way radios in the

vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

Bluetooth® must be enabled both on themobile phone and on the smart Media-Sys-tem.

Enabling and disabling Bluetooth®

The mobile phone must be compatible withthe smart Media-System.Overview of compatible mobile phones:https://www.smart.com/connect.

X Select Settings > Enable Bluetooth.The setting is marked. Bluetooth® is ena-bled or disabled on the smart Media-Sys-tem.

Authorising a mobile phone

Authorising a mobile phone for the firsttime

Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smartMedia-System.

X Select the Telephone menu.X Confirm the display message with Yes.X Enter the security code on the mobile

phone or accept access confirmation (seemanufacturer's operating instructions).The message Bluetooth is enabled isshown.

Authorising another mobile phone

Bluetooth® must be enabled on the smartMedia-System.

X Select Settings > Manage devices.The list of visible mobile phones is dis-played.

X Select a mobile phone from the list.X Enter the security code on the mobile

phone or accept access confirmation (seemanufacturer's operating instructions).The Bluetooth® connection is established.The Bluetooth® connection will be estab-lished automatically in future.


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Downloading telephone data automati-cally

X Select Settings > Download telephone data automatically.

X If necessary, accept the access confirma-tion on the mobile phone.During connection, up to 1,000 contacts areautomatically transferred to the smartMedia-System.

Connecting another authorised mobilephone

X Select Settings > Manage devices.X Select a mobile phone.

The current Bluetooth® connection is ter-minated. The desired mobile phone is con-nected to the smart Media-System instead.

Removing a mobile phone from the list

X Select Settings > Manage devices.X Select W > Delete device(s).X Select a mobile phone.X Select Delete.

Terminating a Bluetooth® connection

X Select Settings > Manage devices.X Select W > Disconnect all devices.X Select a mobile phone.

If the mobile phone leaves the Bluetooth®

receiver range, the connection is automati-cally terminated.

Telephone operation

Useful information

The following conditions must be fulfilled inorder to make a 999 or 112 emergency call:

Ra valid and operational SIM card is inser-ted in the mobile phoneRa mobile phone network is available

Calling a contact from the phone book

X Select Telephone book.X Select the contact.X Select the contact's telephone number.

If the phone book contains multiple contacts,they can be called up using a Search.

Dialling a number

X Select Dial number.X Enter a number on the keypad.X Select Call.

Calling a contact from the call log

X Select Call logs.X Select an entry from the list.

The call log can be sorted according to callsmade, calls received and missed calls usingthe corresponding receiver icon.

Accepting and rejecting an incoming call

If a call is incoming, the following informa-tion will appear on the display:

Rname of caller, if already in the phone bookRnumber of caller, if name of caller not

already in the phone bookRPrivate number, if the caller has the "Hide

caller ID" function switched onX To accept the call, select Accept.X To reject the call, select Reject.

The call will be forwarded to voicemail.

Holding and continuing a call

X Select W > Put on hold.X To continue the call, select Continue.

Transferring a call to the mobile phone

X Select W > Mobile phone.

Ending a call

X Select End call.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Using the smartphone screen applica-tion

Selecting settings for the smartphonescreen

Selecting the preferred smartphone screenapplicationIf mobile phones support Android Auto™ aswell as MirrorLink™, the preferred applica-tion can be selected when a mobile phone isconnected.

X Select System > Smartphone Screen >Smartphone Screen application pref‐erence.

X Select Android Auto™ or MirrorLink™.

Selecting settings to start Android Auto™and MirrorLink™X Select System > Smartphone Screen >Android Auto™ Settings.or

X Select System > Smartphone Screen > Mir‐rorLink Settings.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk me at each launch

If the smartphone has been connectedwith the smart Media-System, you willbe asked whether the preferred smart-phone screen application should bestarted.RYes

If the smartphone has been connectedwith the smart Media-System, the pre-ferred smartphone screen applicationwill be started automatically.RNo

If the smartphone has been connectedwith the smart Media-System, a smart-phone screen application will not bestarted.

Using MirrorLink™

Useful information

MirrorLink® is standard for the connectionbetween the smart Media-System and amobile phone. With MirrorLink®, the contentof the display on your mobile phone can bedisplayed in the smart Media-System.

MirrorLink™ is available for mobile phoneswith the "Android" operating system.Further information: http://www.smart.com/connect.To use MirrorLink™, observe the followingrequirements:

Rthe mobile phone must support Mirror-Link™ version 1.1 and aboveRthe mobile phone is switched onRa MirrorLink™ certified app must be

installed on the mobile phoneRthe GPS connection must be activated on

the mobile phoneRthe time is set on the smart Media-System

Setting up a connectionX Activate MirrorLink™ on your mobile

phone (see the manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

X Connect a mobile phone with a connectingcable to the USB socket in the centre con-sole.

X Select Yes.Apps which have been certified for Mir-rorLink™ will be shown in the smartMedia-System display.

Calling up MirrorLink™ appsX Tap on the home page of the smart

Media-System.MirrorLink™ starts in the smart Media-System display.

X Select the desired app.The display switches to full screen mode.

X To leave full screen display: press and holdthe ò button on the smart Media-Sys-tem until the lower bar is shown.

X To exit the display: select 2.

MirrorLink™ audio playbackIf your mobile phone supports this function,you can control audio playback via the but-tons on the smart Media-System.

X To select the previous track: press the 9button.

X To rewind: press and hold the 9 button.X To select the next track: press the :

button.


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

X To fast forward: press and hold the :button.

X To mute: press the 8 button.

Disconnecting the MirrorLink™ connectionX Select q > Disconnect.

Using Android Auto™

Useful informationAndroid Auto™ is an application for the con-nection between the smart Media-Systemand a mobile phone. Certain mobile phonefunctions and apps can be controlled via thesmart Media-System with Android Auto™.Functions such as telephony, navigation andthe audio playback of Android Auto™ are dis-played on the home page of the smart Media-System.Android Auto™ is available for mobile tele-phones with the Android operating system.Further information: http://www.smart.com/connect.In order to use Android Auto™, the followingconditions must be met:

Rthe mobile phone supports Android Auto™starting from Android™ 5.0Rthe mobile phone is switched onRthe mobile phone has an Internet connec-

tionRthe Android Auto™ app is installed on the

mobile phone

Transmitted vehicle data when usingAndroid Auto™When using Android Auto™, specific vehicledata is transmitted to the mobile phone. Thismakes it possible to use selected mobilephone services efficiently. The mobile phonedoes not have active access to vehicle data.The following system information is trans-mitted:

Rsmart media system software statusRsystem ID (anonymous)This data is transmitted in order to optimisecommunication between the vehicle andmobile phone.A random vehicle code is generated for thispurpose and in order to assign multiple vehi-cles to the mobile phone. This code is not

related to the vehicle identification number(VIN) and is deleted if the smart Media-Sys-tem is reset.The following driving status data is trans-mitted:

Rgear position engagedRinstrument cluster day/night modeThis data is transmitted in order to adapt thecontent displayed to the driving situation.GPS data such as coordinates, speed andcompass direction is transmitted. This datais transmitted only when navigation isactive in order to improve navigation (e.g.when driving through a tunnel).

Setting up a connectionX Activate Android Auto™ on the mobile

phone (see manufacturer's operatinginstructions).

X Connect a mobile phone with a connectingcable to the USB socket in the centre con-sole.

X Select Yes.Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media-System display.

Calling up Android Auto™X Tap on the home page of the smart

Media-System.Android Auto™ starts in the smart Media-System display.

Activating Android Auto™ voice-operatedcontrolWhen Android Auto™ is activated, the systemcan be operated with voice control.

X Press and hold the button on the mul-tifunction steering wheel for approx-imately three seconds.A tone sounds.

Disconnecting Android Auto™X Disconnect the USB connection between

the mobile phone and the smart Media-System.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Using voice control for the mobilephone

Useful information

The voice control of the connected mobilephone can be used (see manufacturer's oper-ating instructions). Not all voice controlservices are supported by the smart Media-System.The requirement for voice control of themobile phone is that Android Auto™ or Mir-rorLink™ are not active.

Activating voice control for the mobilephone

X Connect the mobile phone with the smartMedia-System via Bluetooth®.

X Press and hold the button on thesteering wheel.

The symbol appears in the display.Voice control for the mobile phone isactive.

Further settings

Setting the volume

X Select Settings > Volumes.X Set the volume of the hands-free system

and the ringtone.

Activating voicemail

X Select Voicemail.X Enter the voicemail number on the keypad.X Select Done.

Voicemail is activated and the voicemailnumber is dialled.

Configuring voicemail

X Select Settings > Voice mail configura‐tion.

Updating the phone book

A Bluetooth® connection must be present.

X Select Phone book > W > Update tele‐phone data.

Updating the call log

X Select Call logs > W > Update tele‐phone data.

Adding a contact to favourites

X Select Telephone > Phone book.X Select a contact from the list.X Select W > Add to favourites.X Dial a phone number.

Connecting and operating externaldata storage media

Useful information

The following external data storage mediacan be connected:

RUSB memory stick (USB 2.0 or 3.0 with max.64 GB) or iPod™RSD or SDHC card (max. 64 GB)RExternal audio equipment (AUX connec-

tion)RBluetooth® devices such as mobile phonesThe following formats are supported:

RMP3 filesRWMA filesRACC formats

(.AAC, .M4A, .M4B, .M4P, .M4V, .M4R, .MP4and .3GP)ROGG Vorbis (.OGG, .OGA)RPCM 16 bit (.WAV, .PCM)A data storage medium may contain no morethan eight directory levels.The smart Media-System only recognises thefirst partition of a data storage medium. Thepartition must be formatted as FAT or FAT32.

124 Connecting and operating external data storage media>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Connecting external data storagemedia

Connecting a USB memory stick

X Insert a USB memory stick in the port onthe centre console.Playback starts automatically.

Connecting an SD card

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot inthe centre console.Playback starts automatically.

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

X Authorise and connect a Bluetooth® device,such as a Bluetooth®-capable mobilephone.

Operating external data storage media

Selecting connected external data stor-age media

X Select Menu > Multimedia > Media.X Select connected medium.

Controlling playback from a USB memorystick or SD card

: Selects the previous track; Selects the next track= Stops and continues playback? Switches track repeat onA Switches random playback onB Calls up the context menuC Displays the playlist

D Selects a new track based on categories,e.g. album, genre, folder

E Resumes playback at any point in thetrack

Controlling playback from a Bluetooth®

device

: Selects a new track; Selects the previous track= Stops playback? Selects the next trackA Displays the playlistB Calls up the context menu

Selecting a different device

X Select W > Change source.

Connecting another authorised Blue-tooth® device

X Select W > Find new device.

Enabling and disabling random playback

X To enable: select W > Enable random playback.

X To disable: select W > Disable random playback.

Displaying details of tracks on a USBmemory stick or SD card

X Select W > Track details.

Connecting and operating external data storage media 125

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Selecting a track from current playlist

X Select New selection > Folders.The current playlist is displayed.

X Select Find.A keyboard is shown.

X Enter the name or part of the name of thetrack you are looking for.

Selecting a track from categories

X Select New selection.X Select category for playback.

Switching album cover display on and off

The album cover must be saved in the audiofile.

X Select Multimedia > Settings > Media >Display album cover.

Viewing images

Useful information

Images that have been saved to an SD card orUSB memory stick can be viewed in the smartMedia-System.The following file formats can be displayed:

R.JPGR.GIFR.PNGR.BMP

Image playback

Starting image playback

X Insert SD card or USB memory stick into thecorresponding port.

X Select Multimedia > Images.X Select media source USB or SD.X Select folder.X Select image.

Switching between images

X Swipe left or right.

Specifying a new selection of images

X Select New selection.

Setting image playback

Switching from normal to thumbnail view

X Select Thumbnails.

Switching from thumbnail to normal view

X Select an image.

Displaying in full screen mode

X Select W > Full screen.

Activating the controls in full screenmode

X Tap the touchscreen.

Switching from full screen mode to nor-mal view

X Select W > Normal view.

Enlarging the image

X Select W > Enlarge.

Showing images as a slide show

X Select W > Slide show.

Setting the display duration

X Select W > Image settings > Slide show delay.

X Set the desired time using the controls.

Setting default view for image playback

X Select W > Image settings > Default view.

X Select Normal view or Full screen.

126 Viewing images>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Video playback

Video playback

Starting video playback

X Insert SD card or connect USB stick.X Select Multimedia > Video.X Select USB or SD.X Select folder or video.

All videos in a folder are played one afterthe other.

i The size of the video file may have animpact on the performance of the system.Therefore, only playback videos with alength of up to 5 minutes.

Selecting the next or previous video

X Select D or C.

Stops and continues playback

X Select Ë.

Playing a new video

X Select New selection.X Select a new video

Setting the video view

Playing videos in full screen mode

X Select Full screen.

Setting the default view for video play-back

X Select W > Video settings.X Select Normal view or Full screen.

Using the navigation system

Starting the navigation system

Please note

G WARNING



The navigation system does not provideinformation on stop signs, right of way signs,traffic regulations or road safety regula-tions.Traffic regulations always take priority overthe navigation system's driving recommen-dations.Observe the legal stipulations and trafficregulations of the country you are driving inwhen in navigation mode.

Starting the navigation system

X Select Menu > Navigation.The following functions can be carried out:Rsearching for a destinationRplanning a routeRdisplaying a mapRcalling up TomTom ServicesRchanging navigation settings

Installing map data

G WARNING

SD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.

Using the navigation system 127

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Keep the SD card out of the reach of chil-dren. If a SD card is swallowed, seek med-ical attention immediately.

! To prevent damage to data, only use theSD card provided for the data in the Media-System or for updating map and systemsfiles.

X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot inthe centre console.

X Switch on the device.The map data is imported to the navigationsystem.

Removing an SD card

X Select Menu > System > Remove SD card.X Confirm the display message with Yes.X Press the SD card.X Remove the SD card from the slot.

Updating map data

Regular updates will be offered for the mapdata. The first update can be downloaded forfree in the web portal within 90 days of vehi-cle activation. This requires registration athttp://tomtom.com/forsmart. Further infor-mation is available from any smart centre.

X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insertinto a computer.

X Install update software on the computer.X Run the map update assistant.

i As well as updates, the latest software forthe Media-System can be downloaded andPremium Voices by TomTom can be pur-chased.

Entering and managing destinations

Entering a destination by address

X When using the navigation system for thefirst time, enter country.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... >Address.

X If desired, change the country using theflag symbol.

X Enter town or postcode.

X Select the destination from the list.X Select the street.X Select the house number.X Confirm with Done.

Searching for a car park near the desti-nation address

This function can be called up when enteringthe destination.

X Select W > Nearby car park.A list of car parks near the current desti-nation appears.

Displaying information about the desti-nation address

This function can be called up when enteringthe destination.

X Select W > Show info.

Entering a destination using the map

A location on the map can be selected as thedestination.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point on map.

X Align the map view with the destination.X Tap the destination point on the display.

The symbol selected is highlighted in blue.X Tap on the symbol to confirm.

Entering a destination using the voicecontrol system

X Press the button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.A tone sounds.

X Say the command "Enter address".X When prompted by the voice control sys-

tem, say the destination address, includ-ing street name, house number and city.

X Say the voice command "Yes" or, if severalpossible destinations are displayed, saythe number.

128 Using the navigation system>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Selecting a destination from the list oflast destinations

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Recent destinations.

X Select destination.

Entering a destination using geo-coor-dinates

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Lati‐tude Longitude.

X Enter the longitude and latitude.

Setting home location

X Select Navigation > Settings > Set home address.

X Enter a home address.

Setting home as a destination

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Home.

Selecting a saved location as destination

At least one destination must be stored forthis function.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Saved locations.

X Select destination.

Managing saved locations

X Select Navigation > Settings > Manage saved locations.

Entering a charging station as a desti-nation

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Charg‐ing stations.The following list of locations appears inwhich a charging station can be searchedfor:RNear my locationRAlong the routeRNear destination

RNear homeRIn a city

X Select the location for the charging stationsearch.A list of the corresponding charging sta-tions appears. There is an automatic checkwhether a charging point is free on thesecharging stations. The check may takeseveral minutes. When the check is fin-ished, a message appears. If a chargingstation has a charging point which is notbeing used, it will be marked green. If nocharging point is free, or no information isavailable, the charging station is markedgrey. Charging stations from the map datawhich cannot be checked, are not marked.A maximum of 24 charging stations can bechecked.

i Five minutes after the check, the markingautomatically changes from green to grey.

X Select a charging station.

Entering a point of interest

POIs such as museums, restaurants or carparks near a location are displayed on themap.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > Point of interest.The following list of surrounding areasappears. A POI can be searched for in theseareas:RNear my locationRAlong the routeRNear destinationRNear homeRIn a city

X Select surrounding area for the search for aPOI.The following list of categories for POIsappears:RList of categories for POIs: e.g. charging

station or restaurantRPOI name searchRPOI search within a category

X Select category for the search.X Select a POI.

i If the charging station category is selec-ted, only charging stations from the mapdata are searched. Charging stations that


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

can be checked for charging point availa-bility are not taken into account.

Managing POIs

Adding a POI categoryX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI category.

X Enter the name and symbol for the new POIcategory.

Deleting a POI categoryX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI category.

X Select the POI category to be deleted.

Adding POIsX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Add POI.If no POI categories have been defined yet,a prompt appears to enter a POI category.

X Select the category for the POI.X Enter your POI.

Deleting POIsX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Delete POI.

X Select POI category.X Select the POI to be deleted.

Editing POIsX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Edit POI.

X Select POI category.X Customise the POI properties.

Setting alerts for a nearby POIX Select Navigation > Settings > Manage POIs > Warning when near POI.

X Select POI category.X Set the distance at which the message

should appear.X Set the type of alert issued.

Entering a destination via the TomTomLIVE service "TomTom Places"

POIs from the "TomTom Places" online data-base are available using the "TomTom Pla-ces" function.

X Select Navigation > Drive to... > TomTom Places.A list of search criteria appears which canbe used to search for a POI.

X Select the search criteria.X Enter a search term.

If a large number of search results areavailable, 20 additional search results canbe downloaded.

Changing the route

Useful information

Once the destination has been selected, thenavigation system calculates the route to thedestination. The following options are avail-able for adjusting route guidance:

Rcalculate alternative routesRadjust routes calculated by the navigation

systemRplan routes in advance and travel via spe-

cific way pointsRadjust settings for calculating routesOnce the route is calculated, a route sum-mary is shown. By default, the quickest routewill be calculated for route planning, takinginto account IQ Routes™. Traffic informationis taken into account when calculating theroute.Depending on the remaining range, sectionsof the route receive the following colours:

Rgreen: remaining range is expected to besufficient for the route.Rorange: this route may or may not be able

to be completed depending on the drivingstyle and the influence of external factors.Rred: remaining range is not expected to be

sufficient for the route.The "route overview" function allows you toset whether the summary of a calculatedroute is automatically faded out from thedisplay after ten seconds.If the route is not confirmed with Done, theview switches after approximately ten sec-onds automatically to the map view.


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Displaying a planned route

Calculating the routeX Enter a destination.X Select Done.

The route is displayed. If the remainingrange is not expected to be sufficient toreach the destination, a prompt willappear asking whether a charging stationshould be added to the route.

Displaying the route detailsX Select W > Route details.X Select one of the following functions:RDisplay instructions

An overview of the route with directionsappears.RDisplay a map of the route

The route appears on a map.RDisplay the destination

The destination for the route appears.By pressing W, it is possible to searchfor a car park near the destination or addthe location to the saved locations.RShow traffic on route

Traffic disruptions along the route areshown.RSummary

A summary of the route details appears.

Saving a planned route

X Select W > Save Itinerary .

Changing the route

Cancelling the routeX Select Navigation > Change route > Can‐cel route.When a new destination is entered, routeguidance can be resumed again.

Calculating an alternative routeX Select Navigation > Change route > Cal‐culate alternative.A new route is calculated and displayedthat takes you on different roads.

X Select the alternative route or a previousone.

Route guidance via way pointThe route can be adjusted by entering up tofour way points.

X Select Navigation > Change route >Travel via.If a way point has already been entered, alist of the saved way points will be dis-played.

X Select Add.X Select a new way point from Address,Recent destinations, Saved locations,TomTom Places or POI.The new way point is added.

Avoiding road blocksThe route can be changed if a section of roadalong the route is blocked or there is a trafficjam.

X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid roadblock.

X Select the length of the route that needs tobe avoided.

Avoiding specific roadsThe route is calculated to avoid specificroads.

X Select Navigation > Change route > Avoid part of route.A list of the roads on the route is displayed.

X Select the road you wish to avoid.

Taking traffic disruptions into accountThe route is recalculated based on currenttraffic informationTraffic information is not available in allcountries and regions.

X Select Navigation > Change route > Mini‐mise delays.An overview of the traffic disruptionsalong the route will be shown.

X Select the traffic disruption you wish toavoid.

Planning a route in advance

Adding a routeX Select Navigation > Routes.X Select Add.X Select the starting point of the route.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

X Enter the route destination.X Enter at least one way point for the route.X Enter the route name.X Confirm with Done.

Starting navigation using a saved routeX Select Navigation > Routes.X Select the desired route.X Select W > Go.

Setting route planning

Selecting the route typeX Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Route types.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk for every routeRAlways plan the fastest routeRAlways plan eco routesRAlways avoid motorwaysRAlways plan the shortest route

Selecting the setting for toll roadsX Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Toll roads.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk for toll roads on routeRAlways avoid toll roadsRDo not avoid toll roads

Selecting the setting for ferry connectionsX Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Ferry connections.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk for ferries on my routeRAlways avoid ferriesRDo not avoid ferries

i Route planning treats the Eurotunnel asa ferry connection.

Selecting the setting for unpaved roadsX Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Unpaved roads.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk for unpaved roads on my routeRAlways avoid unpaved roads

Selecting the setting for carpool lanesCarpool lanes are lanes which can only beused by vehicles with at least two occupants.

X Select Navigation > Settings > Route planning > Carpool lane settings.

X Select one of the following settings:RAsk for carpool lanes on my routeRAlways avoid carpool lanes.RNever avoid carpool lanes

Using information during route guid-ance

Useful information

Navigation announcements provide guid-ance during the journey without distractingyou from traffic conditions. In addition, thedisplay shows information about the route.

Switching navigation announcements onand off

X Tap on the area of the next navigationmanoeuvre during route guidance.

X Select Turn on voice guidance or Turn off voice guidance.

Information such as traffic reports andwarnings will be played even if the naviga-tion announcements have been deactivated.During route guidance, traffic informationcan be shown for the route ahead. The fol-lowing traffic information can be received:

RTraffic announcements (RDS/TMC)RHD Traffic (a TomTom Live service)

i HD Traffic Information takes precedence.

Live services are not available in all coun-tries and regions. Further information:http://tomtom.com/services


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Tracking navigation on the display

: Zoom in and out of the map view; Maximum permitted speed= Name of the next main road or informa-

tion about the next street sign? Traffic informationA Route information

Warning for remaining range to destina-tion

B Compass and symbol for two or three-dimensional map display

C Context menuD Next navigation manoeuvre with dis-

tance and symbol for volume adjustmentE Information about current radio or audio

equipment

X Tap on an area or on a symbol in the mapdisplay:RMap: to switch to the overview mapR:: to zoom in and out of the map viewR?: to show traffic reports on the routeRA: to display the route detailsRB: to switch between two or three-dimen-

sional map displayRC: to open the context menuRD: to repeat the navigation instruction,

change the volume of navigationannouncements or switch offRE: to switch to the corresponding radio,

multimedia or telephone menuThe navigation system zooms in on the mapview as the vehicle approaches a junction.This makes it possible to follow turningmanoeuvres more accurately.Shortly before navigating a motorway junc-tion or exit, the display will show a three-dimensional representation of the lanes and

the exit. Lane Keeping Assist is not availablefor all junctions in all countries.

Traffic information details

: Overall delay on route; Traffic disruption (packed snow)= Traffic disruption (rain)? Traffic disruption (traffic jam)A Current location and distance to next

traffic disruption

During route guidance, traffic information isshown for the route ahead. When there are anumber of traffic disruptions in quick suc-cession, only the very next disruption on theroute will be displayed.Traffic information is not available in allcountries and regions.

Colour Meaning

Grey Unknown or unexplained situa-tion

Orange Slow-moving traffic

Red Traffic jam

Darkred

Standstill or road blocked

Calling up more detailed informationabout the traffic problems

X Tap on the display for traffic informationduring route guidance.

Scrolling through the traffic reports

X Tap on the message on the touchscreen andswipe left or right.


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Displaying the overview map

Useful information

With the "View map" function, the displayshows a slidable, two-dimensional overviewmap. The map shows your current position,as well as a number of other elements, suchas Favourites.

Displaying a map

X Select Navigation > View map.A map of the surrounding area will beshown.

X To search: select W > Search.

Controlling the map view

Moving the mapX Tap on the centre of the touchscreen.X Swipe in the desired direction. The map

will then move in the respective direction.

Zooming in on the mapX Place two fingers slightly apart in the

middle of the touchscreen.X Move your fingers away from each other.

Reducing the scale of the mapX Place two fingers at a greater distance

apart on the screen. Do not place your fin-gers at the very top area or very bottomarea of the display.

X Pull your fingers towards each other.

Displaying the reachability map

If no route is planned, a reachability map canbe displayed in order to roughly gauge therange with the current charge status.

X Select Navigation > View map.X Select W > View reachability map.

Showing and hiding additional informa-tion on the map

X Select Navigation > View map.X Select W > Change map information.X Select one of the following information

options:

RTraffic informationRNamesRPoints of interest (POIs)RSatellite imagesRCoordinates

Using TomTom Services with the navi-gation system

Useful information

In the TomTom Services menu, traffic infor-mation and other TomTom-LIVE services canbe called up and managed.TomTom Live Services are available for asubscription fee. The following TomTomServices come pre-installed and, followingactivation, can be used free of charge for aperiod of three years:

RHD TrafficRRadar cameras (not available in all coun-

tries)RWeatherRTomTom PlacesMore information on serviceshttp://www.tomtom.com/services.More information on availability in specificcountries: http://smart.com/connectTomTom Services can also be called up andmanaged in the Services menu. In the mainmenu, select Services > TomTom Services.

i If you have subscribed to the "TomTomTraffic" service and this is available, the"Traffic info" menu will be called "TomTomTraffic".

Activating TomTom Services

TomTom Services must be activated in thesmart Media-System before using them forthe first time. If TomTom Services are not yetactivated, a corresponding button will bedisplayed in the main menu and in the Serv‐ices menu.


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

To activate TomTom Services for the firsttime, observe the following requirements:

Ran SD card with map data is inserted intothe SD card slotRa valid vehicle position is available on the

mapRa mobile phone network is available

X Select Services > Activate My Services.X Confirm the display message with Yes.

After a short while, TomTom Services areavailable.

X Select Services > TomTom Services.The TomTom Services installed on thedevice are displayed.

X Select the desired TomTom service.A display message appears. TomTom Serv-ices are activated.

Starting TomTom Services

X Select Navigation > TomTom Services.

Checking subscription status for Tom-Tom Services

X Select Navigation > TomTom Services > My Services.The services available on the device andtheir subscription status will be shown.

Displaying traffic information along theroute

X Tap on the area of traffic information dur-ing route guidance.

X Swipe left or right to switch between traf-fic information.

Adjusting the route according to trafficdisruptions

X Select Navigation > TomTom Services >Traffic > Minimise delays.A faster route that had been previouslyrejected or route which may not have beentaken into account due to the Never change my route setting for the trafficinformation is selected.

Displaying traffic disruptions on theoverview map

X Select W > View map during route guid-ance.Traffic disruptions are displayed as sym-bols on the overview map. Large area traf-fic disruptions such as rain, fog or snoware displayed with several symbols.

X To view detailed information, tap on a traf-fic disruption symbol.

The following symbols are used:

Symbol Meaning

Traffic jam

Road blocked

Traffic disruption

Construction site

One or more lanes blocked

Accident

Traffic disruption avoidedusing the traffic information

Fog

Wind

Snow

Black ice

Rain

i Large area traffic disruptions such asrain, fog or snow are displayed on theoverview map with several symbols.

Viewing traffic information for the routeto work

X Select Navigation > TomTom Services >Traffic > Traffic info. for route to work.

X Select one of the following settings:


>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

RHome to workRWork to homeRChange the home to work route

Changing the settings for traffic infor-mation

X Select Navigation > TomTom Services >Traffic > Traffic info. settings.

X Select one of the following settings:RAlways change to this route

If a faster route has been calculated dueto a traffic report, the navigation systemautomatically changes the route.RRequest confirmation for route

If a faster route has been calculated dueto a traffic report, the navigation systemwill ask which route should be used.RNever change my route

The navigation system will not changethe route, even if a traffic announcementhas been made.

Setting the navigation system

Setting the voice

The voice which is used for navigation com-mands can be changed. It is possible tochoose between computer-generated voicesor voices recorded by professionals. For voi-ces that have been recorded by professio-nals, only basic navigation commands willbe spoken.

X Select System > Sound > Voice.X Select voice for playback.X To listen to the voice, select Test.

Setting the voice output

The read-aloud function is only available ina computer-generated voice.

X Select System > Sound > Voice output settings.

X Select one of the following settings:RRead early warning instructions aloudRRead motorway lane instructions aloud

RRead traffic info. aloud when nav‐igatingRRead foreign street names aloudRRead street numbers aloudRRead street names aloudRRead weather information aloudRRead POI warnings aloudRRead aloud warningsRRead signposts aloud

Changing the map

X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map.

X Select the desired map.

Changing the map colours

X Select Navigation > Settings > Change map colours.

X Press , or . to select the desireddisplay.

Changing the settings for electric drive

X Select Navigation > Settings > electric drive settings.The following functions can be called up:Rdeactivating or activating the battery

warningWhen the charge status of the high-voltage battery has reached 20% and thebattery warning is activated, a displaymessage appears.Rshowing or hiding charging stations on

the mapRmanaging charging stationsRselecting the charging cable

The settings for both the type of chargingand charging cable are used by the naviga-tion system to refine the selection of avail-able charging stations. During navigation,the following options can be selected via theW context menu:RSearch for type of chargingRSearch for electricity providerRDisplay all charging stationsA display message appears if there is someincompatibility between the defined set-tings and a selected charging station.


Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Setting safety warnings

X Select System > Safety warnings.X To select the desired settings:RSuggest driving breaksRWarn when driving near schoolsRWarn when driving faster than allowedRWarn when driving faster than a set speed

X Select Resume.X Select a warning tone for the respective

safety warning.

For the "Warn when driving faster than a setspeed" function, the speed above which thewarning tone should sound must be entered.

Setting the units of measurement for dis-tance

All units of measurement for distance in thenavigation system can be changed. The unitsof measurement for distance of other dis-plays are not changed, such as distance dis-plays for the eco score or the on-board com-puter.

X Select System > Set units > Distance units.

X Select one of the following settings:RKilometresRMiles

Setting the units for GPS coordinates

X Select System > Set units > GPS co-ordi‐nate display.

X Select one of the following settings:RDegrees (d°)RDegrees, Minutes (d° m.m')RDegrees, Minutes, Seconds (d° m\' s\'')

Managing apps

Useful information

If available, apps may be installed and man-aged on the smart Media-System. Apps andthe use of TomTom services can be called upand managed in the Services menu.

The smart Media-System uses a mobilephone connection for data connection. Pleasetake note of the following information whenusing data services:

RThe mobile connectivity and built-in SIMcard for this vehicle can only be used fordata services. These are offered by certainthird parties as well as Daimler AG. Usageoccurs via the smart Media-System in thevehicle. The use of data services requiresthe conclusion of separate agreementsbetween the vehicle user and the respec-tive provider. Voice service usage is notpermitted. As such, the SIM card must bepermanently installed as factory equip-ment.RThe mobile communications connectivity

and the SIM card may only be used respon-sibly in accordance with the applicablelaws and other legal requirements of thecorresponding countries. Insofar as this iswithin the power of the vehicle user.RUpgrading, reproduction, reverse assem-

bly and disassembly of the SIM card arenot permitted. Statutory authorityremains unaffected.

Failure to follow the above instructions, canin some cases lead to temporary or perma-nent deactivation of the mobile connectionand the SIM card. This depends on theseverity of non-compliance. The measuresdescribed here, contribute in particulartowards protecting the Daimler AG and itscontractual partners from negative legalconsequences arising from non-compliance.The availability of mobile connectivity inindividual countries depends on the exis-tence of corresponding mobile service agree-ments with local mobile network providers.Availability can therefore change from timeto time. The maximum period of validity forthe mobile connectivity is 15 years from thetime of installation in the vehicle.

Installing Apps

If available, apps may be used on the SmartMedia-System. This requires registration athttp://tomtom.com/forsmart.

X Remove SD card from the vehicle and insertinto a computer.

Further information: http://tomtom.com/forsmart.

Managing apps 137

>> U

sin

g th

e sm

art

Med

ia-S

yst

em.

Z

Displaying and calling up apps

Displaying apps

X Select Services > Settings > Applica‐tions manager.The Apps installed on the SD card areshown in the smart Media-System.

Calling up apps

X Select Services.X Select the desired app.

Calling up the connectivity manager

The connectivity manager allows you tomanage the devices connected to the smartMedia-System.

X Select Services > Settings > Connectiv‐ity manager.

Managing data sharing

Enabling or disabling data sharing

If data sharing has not been enabled before-hand, a corresponding message is shownwhen the smart Media-System is started up.Data sharing can be enabled or disabled atany time.

X Select Services > Settings > Data shar‐ing.

X Select one of the following settings:RYes

Enable data sharingRNo

Disable data sharing.

Displaying additional information

X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing> About.

Displaying text in another language

X Select Services > Settings > Data sharing> Language.

138 Managing apps>>

Usi

ng

the

smar

t M

edia

-Sy

stem

.

Online access to the vehicle

G WARNING



G WARNING

If you use mobile information systems andcommunications devices while driving,you will be distracted from traffic condi-tions. You could then lose control of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Only operate these devices when the vehi-cle is stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the coun-try in which you are currently driving.You can use "smart control" to access remotequery and to configure your vehicleremotely. It can be accessed from computersand smartphones. The Internet address isavailable from any smart centre. It is alsopossible to call up "smart control" via thesmart website.Access to "smart control" is free of charge forthe first three years commencing from hand-over of the new vehicle, subject to the avail-ability of the service. Thereafter you cancontinue to subscribe to use the "smart con-trol" service.The availability and features of "smart con-trol" may vary from country to country.Requirements for the use of "smart control":

RYou must register on the "smart control"website.

A valid e-mail address is necessary forregistration and the terms of use must beaccepted.RThe vehicle must be linked with a personal

"smart control" account at a smart centre.Verification and presentation of the vehi-cle registration document are required tolink the vehicle. The vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) is also required.RThe desired functions must be activated

after linking the vehicle.For activation, the "smart control" terms ofuse for both the remote query and remoteconfiguration must be accepted via a por-tal. The portal address is supplied by thesmart centre.RThe vehicle must be connected to the

Internet.Connection is made possible via the mobilecommunications module integrated in thevehicle.

Once these requirements are fulfilled, thefollowing functions, for example, may beused:

RCalling up the current locking status of thevehicle.RCalling up information on the distance

before the next recommended service or ifa service is already due.RCalling up the current vehicle position in

the range of approx. 1.5 km around thevehicle.

During the charging process, additional dis-plays can be called up such as the predictedtime until charging is completed or thecharging capacity.If there is a delay in the synchronisation ofdata via the mobile phone network, the dis-plays in the vehicle and at "smart control"may temporarily differ from each other.Further information on "smart control" isavailable at any smart centre.

Using smart "ready to" services

Useful information

smart "ready to" services are only availablein certain countries.The functions are enabled via a communica-tion module and the smart "ready to" app.

Using smart "ready to" services 139

>> U

sin

g on

lin

e of

feri

ngs

.

Z

Information as well as the Internet addressesfor the smart "ready to" services are availa-ble at any smart centre.

i If you are already using a smart "readyto" service, additional services can beactivated with your user details in theusual web portal or via the app.

The communication module and activationare required in order to use the smart "readyto" services:RRegister on the "ready to" web portal.

A valid e-mail address and the vehicleidentification number (VIN) are necessaryfor registration, and the conditions of usemust be accepted.RInstall the "ready to" app on your smart-

phone and create a user account.

Using the Key Card Holder

Key Card Holder : is fitted in the glove com-partment and is intended for the storage andinventory of the vehicle key and up to twocards (e.g. fuel card, parking card or car washcard).The inventory is available within certainsmart "ready to" services.For an inventory, the key and/or the cardsmust be equipped with an RFID tag.

140 Using smart "ready to" services>>

Usi

ng

onli

ne

offe

rin

gs.

Stowing small objects

Please note

G WARNING

If you stow objects in the vehicle interior inan unsuitable way, they could slip or bethrown around and thus hit vehicle occu-pants. Additionally, the cup holders, openstowage spaces and mobile phone bracketscannot restrain the objects placed in themin the event of an accident. There is a riskof injury, especially in the event of brakingor sudden changes in direction.

RAlways stow objects so they cannot bethrown around in these or similar situa-tions.

RAlways ensure that objects do not pro-trude over the top of stowage compart-ments or stowage nets.

RAll closable stowage compartmentsshould be closed before beginning yourjourney.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects orobjects which are too large behind thelast bench seat or under the passengerseats.

G WARNING

The cup holder cannot secure a drinks con-tainer in place during a journey. If you usea cup holder during a journey, the drinkscontainer could be flung around and liquidcould be spilt. Vehicle occupants couldcome into contact with the liquid and, inparticular, be scalded by hot liquid. Youcould be distracted from the traffic situa-tion and lose control of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident and injury.

Only use the cup holder when the vehicle isstationary. Only place containers of a suit-able size in the cup holder. Seal the con-tainer, in particular when it contains hotliquid.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

Using the compartments

X To stow objects, use the following com-partments:R: Stowage compartments in the doorsR; Cup holder in the front centre consoleR= Glove compartmentR? Stowage net in the front-passenger

footwellRA Sliding drawer in the centre consoleRB smart fortwo coupé electric drive:

Spectacles compartment above the driv-er's seat and above the front-passengerseatRVelcro strip on the front passenger seat

for stowing a handbagRCup holder in the rear centre console

with a recess for storing a mobile phoneRsmart fortwo coupé electric drive: stow-

age compartment in the lower tailgateRStowage net with two net pockets on the

back of the boot separator

Stowing small objects 141

>> L

oad

ing

and

sto

win

g.

Z

Locking/unlocking the glove compart-ment

X Insert the key into the lock and turn clock-wise to position 2 (to lock) or anticlock-wise to position 1 (to unlock).

Opening the stowage compartment inthe tailgate (smart fortwo coupé)

! Do not exceed the lower tailgate maxi-mum load of 100 kg. It may otherwisebecome damaged.

X Open the tailgate.X Pull handle : on the inside of the lower

tailgate upwards.X Lift up the cover in the direction of the

arrow.

Stowing luggage and large objects

Please note

G WARNING

If you stow objects in the vehicle interior inan unsuitable way, they could slip or bethrown around and thus hit vehicle occu-pants. Additionally, the cup holders, openstowage spaces and mobile phone bracketscannot restrain the objects placed in themin the event of an accident. There is a riskof injury, especially in the event of brakingor sudden changes in direction.

RAlways stow objects so they cannot bethrown around in these or similar situa-tions.

RAlways ensure that objects do not pro-trude over the top of stowage compart-ments or ruffled pockets.

RAll closable stowage compartmentsshould be closed before beginning yourjourney.

RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard,pointed, sharp-edged, fragile objects orobjects which are too large behind thelast bench seat or under the passengerseats.

The handling characteristics of a laden vehi-cle are dependent on the distribution of theload within the vehicle.Observe the following loading guidelineswhen loading and transporting luggage andloads:

Rdo not exceed the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight or the permissibleaxle loads for the vehicle (including occu-pants)Rthe load must not protrude above the upper

edge of the head restraintsRensure that no items of luggage can enter

the passenger compartment above orbetween the seatsRensure that loaded objects are stowed

safely and are securedRload heavy objects at the bottom and light

objects at the top

142 Stowing luggage and large objects>>

Loa

din

g an

d s

tow

ing.

Rthe load compartment is the preferredplace to stow objectsRstow heavy loads as far forwards and as

low down in the load compartment as pos-sible

Opening the load compartment (smartfortwo coupé)

! The tailgates swing to the rear, bothupwards and downwards, when opened.Therefore, make sure that there is suffi-cient clearance above, behind and belowthe tailgates.

X Press the é button on the key.X Fold the upper tailgate upwards.

X Pull lever : upwards.X Fold the lower tailgate down.

Closing the boot (smart fortwo coupé)

X Fold the lower tailgate upwards andengage on both sides.

X Pull the upper tailgate down and press itclosed.

X Press the & button on the key.The vehicle is locked.

Opening the boot (smart fortwo cabrio)

Opening the tailgate

X Press the % button on the key.X Press button : in the handle recess.X Fold down the tailgate.

Opening the rear soft top

X Open the tailgate.X Press both latch levers :.X Swing the rear soft top up.

Closing the boot (smart fortwo cabrio)

Closing the rear soft top

! When closing the tailgate, you must firstlock the tail cover. Otherwise, you couldbreak the catch lever.

X Pull the rear soft top down until it engages.X Lock the rear soft top with both latch lev-

ers.

Stowing luggage and large objects 143

>> L

oad

ing

and

sto

win

g.

Z

Closing the tailgate

X Pull the tailgate up until it engages.X Press the & button on the key.

The vehicle is locked.

Enlarging the load compartment: fold-ing the seat backrest forwards

Folding the seat backrest forwards (usingthe lever)

Seat with a lever

X Lift lever ; and slide the front-passengerseat to its rearmost position.

X Pull lever : forwards.X Fold the seat backrest forwards at the same

time.

Folding the seat backrest forwards (usingthe handwheel)

Seat with a handwheel

X Turn handwheel : forward.

Folding back the seat backrest

Please note

G WARNING

If the seat backrest is not engaged, it mayfold forwards, e.g. during braking or in theevent of an accident.

RAs a result, a backrest which is notengaged would press you into the seatbelt. The seat belt cannot perform itsintended protective function and couldadditionally cause injury.

RThe backrest cannot restrain objects orloads in the boot.

This poses an increased risk of injury.

Before every journey, make sure that thebackrest is engaged as described.

Folding back the seat backrest (using thelever)

X Pull lever :.X Push the seat backrest back at the same

time until it engages.

Folding back the seat backrest (using thehandwheel)

X Turn handwheel : backwards.

Using the boot separator

Fitting the boot separator

G WARNING

On its own, the boot cover cannot secure orrestrain heavy objects, items of luggageand heavy loads. You could be hit by anunsecured load during sudden changes indirection, braking or in the event of anaccident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g.

144 Using the boot separator>>

Loa

din

g an

d s

tow

ing.

by using lashing material, even if you areusing the boot cover.

For easier fitting, fold the front-passengerseat backrest forwards.

X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper andlower tailgate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail-gate.

X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft topup.

X Hold boot separator : with the luggagenet bag in the direction of the passengercompartment in the boot.

X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; onthe right side.

X Slide handle ? to the right and hold.X Insert boot separator : into bracket ; on

the left side.X Release handle ?.

Boot separator : snaps into place.X Secure the luggage net bag with the Velcro

fasteners.

If boot separator : is not required and nosubwoofer is installed, it can be attached tobrackets =.

Hooking and unhooking the boot sep-arator

X Grip boot separator : in the middle andpull it back.

X Hook boot separator into left and right rearbrackets A.

Removing/fitting the charging cablebag

Removing the charging cable bag

X Turn both buttons : to the left.The buttons are released from the anchor-age.

X Fold the charging cable bag to the left.The Velcro fasteners under the chargingcable bag are detached.

X Remove snap hook ;.

Removing/fitting the charging cable bag 145

>> L

oad

ing

and

sto

win

g.

Z

Installing the charging cable bag

X Place the charging cable bag with its sideresting on the engine compartment coverand then position it on the side trim.

X Position the charging cable bag in a ver-tical position.Take hold of the Velcro fasteners beneaththe charging cable bag.

X Push both buttons : into the anchorageand turn them to the right.

X Secure snap hook ;.

146 Removing/fitting the charging cable bag>>

Loa

din

g an

d s

tow

ing.

Useful information

The engine compartment in the smart islocated at the rear, below the boot. Servicefluid reservoirs are located under the servicecover at the front.When working on the vehicle, always complywith all safety regulations. Always havework in the engine compartment carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

Removing/fitting the subwoofer

Removing the subwoofer

X Release quick-release fastener : in thedirection of the arrow.

X Reach into the recess on the quick-releasefastener.

X Detach, tilt and pull the subwoofer to theright.

X Pull out the connector.

Fitting the subwoofer

X Insert the connector.X Place the subwoofer at the base of the side

trim.X Turn quick-release fastener : upwards.X Press the bracket into the recess in side

trim ;.X Turn quick-release fastener : to the

right.

Opening and closing the service cover

Please note

G WARNING

If the service cover is not locked, it maycome loose during driving and block yourview or endanger other road users. There isa risk of an accident and injury.

Therefore, make sure that the service coveris locked before driving off.

G WARNING

If the windscreen wipers start to movewhen the service cover is open, you couldbecome caught up in the wiper rods. Thereis a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipersand the ignition before you open the ser-vice cover.

! To ensure unhindered air intake, com-pletely remove any dirt or snow from theventilation slots above the service cover.

The vehicle must be secured against rollingaway.On vehicles with a lockable service cover, theservice cover must be unlocked before it isopened.

Opening and closing the service cover 147

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Unlocking the service cover

X Insert the tip of the key into the opening oflock cover :.

X Press the key to the right ; to lever up thelock cover.

X Remove the lock cover.X Insert the key into the lock and turn it 90°

clockwise.

Opening the service cover

X Pull both levers ; in the direction of thearrow.

X Lift service cover = at the front.X Pull service cover = slightly forwards and

lift upwards.X Carefully rest service cover =, still

attached to the straps, against the front ofthe vehicle.

Closing the service cover

X Lift service cover =.X Slide bars A on the left and right of the

service cover under the bars on wing ?.

X Press service cover = downwards.X Press both levers ; backwards in the

direction of the arrow.

Locking the service cover

X Insert the key into the lock and turn it toposition 1.

X Insert lock cover : on the driver's sideand snap it into place.

148 Opening and closing the service cover>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

Checking service products and toppingup

Please note

G WARNING

Service product can be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.

Observe the instructions on the respectiveoriginal container when using, storing anddisposing off service products. Alwaysstore service products in the sealed origi-nal container. Always keep service prod-ucts out of the reach of children.


Dispose of service products in an environ-mentally-responsible manner.

Also observe the information in the "Serviceproducts" section (Y page 202).Service products include the following:

RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindscreen washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantService products approved by smart: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com

Checking the coolant and topping up

Checking the coolant level

X Stop the vehicle on a level surface.X Let the coolant cool down for at least

30 minutes.

X Open the service cover.X Check reservoir ; visually.

The fluid level must be between the MINmark and the MAX mark.

Topping up the coolant

G WARNING

The cooling system is pressurised whenthe drive system is at operating tempera-ture. When you open the cap, you could bescalded by hot coolant spraying out. Thereis a risk of injury.

Let the drive system cool down before youopen the cap. Wear gloves and eye protec-tion when opening. Open the cap slowly torelieve pressure.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. onthe Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

If antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor is present inthe correct concentration, the boiling pointof the coolant during operation is approx-imately 130 †.The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concen-tration in the engine cooling system shouldbe 50% (antifreeze protection down to -37 †).This will protect the engine cooling systemagainst freezing down to approximately-25 †.

X Cover cap : of coolant expansion tank ;with a cloth.

X Turn the cap slowly one half turn. If nec-essary, allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn the cap further and remove it.X Top up the coolant to the MAX level.X Replace the cap and tighten it as far as it

will go.X Close the service cover.

i See "Technical data" for information onrecommended coolants.

Checking service products and topping up 149

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Topping up the washer fluid

G WARNING

Windscreen washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotcomponents in the front compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire andinjury.

Make sure that windscreen washer con-centrate is not spilled next to the fillerneck.

X Open the service cover.X Pull cap : upwards at the tab.X If available, pull the removable nozzle up

as far as the stop.X Top up with washer fluid.X If available, push the removable nozzle

down and push it inside.X Replace and tightly screw on cap :.X Close the service cover.

i See "Technical data" for information onwindscreen washer fluid and antifreeze.

Checking wheels and tyres

G Warning

A flat tyre severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive with a flat tyre. Immediatelyreplace the flat tyre with your spare wheel,or consult a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

Damaged tyres can cause tyre inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.

Check the tyres regularly for signs of dam-age and replace any damaged tyres imme-diately.

G WARNING

Insufficient tyre tread will reduce tyretraction. The tyre is no longer able to dis-sipate water. This means that on wet roadsurfaces, the risk of aquaplaning increa-ses, in particular where speed is not adap-ted to suit the driving conditions. There isa risk of accident.

If the tyre pressure is too high or too low,tyres may exhibit different levels of wearat different locations on the tyre tread.Thus, you should regularly check the treaddepth and the condition of the tread acrossthe entire width of all tyres.

Minimum tyre tread depth for:

Rsummer tyres: 3 mm

RM+S tyres: 4 mm

For safety reasons, replace the tyres beforethe legally prescribed limit for the mini-mum tyre tread depth is reached.

! If you cannot avoid driving over obsta-cles, e.g. kerbs, do so slowly and at anobtuse angle only. You could otherwisedamage the wheel rims and tyres.

Modification work on the brake system andwheels is not permitted. The use of spacers orbrake dust shields is not permitted. Thisinvalidates the general operating permit forthe vehicle.Check the wheels and tyres for damage atleast once a month, as well as after drivingoff-road or on poorly surfaced roads.Run-in new tyres at moderate speeds for thefirst 100 km. The tyres only attain their max-imum performance after this distance.Vibrations, audible noises and unusual han-dling characteristics, e.g. pulling to one side,can indicate damage to wheels or tyres.

150 Checking wheels and tyres>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

If you suspect a tyre defect:

X Reduce vehicle speed.X Stop the vehicle as soon as possible.X Check the wheels and tyres for damage.

If you find no signs of damage, have thewheels and tyres checked at a specialistworkshop.

Changing a wheel

Please note

G WARNING

Interchanging the front and rear wheelsmay severely impair the driving charac-teristics if the wheels or tyres have differ-ent dimensions. The wheel brakes or sus-pension components may also be damaged.There is a risk of accident.

Interchange front and rear wheels only ifthe wheels and tyres are of the samedimensions.

G WARNING

Exceeding the stated tyre load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximumspeed could lead to tyre damage or the tyrebursting. There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tyre types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observethe tyre load rating and speed ratingrequired for your vehicle.

G WARNING

If wheels and tyres of the wrong size areused, the wheel brakes or suspension com-ponents may be damaged. There is a risk ofan accident.

Always replace wheels and tyres withthose that fulfil the specifications of theoriginal part.

When replacing wheels, make sure to fitthe correct:

Rdesignation

Rtype

When replacing tyres, make sure to fit thecorrect:

Rdesignation

Rmanufacturer

Rtype

! On vehicles fitted with a tyre pressuremonitor, electronic components are loca-ted in the wheel.Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied inthe area of the valve, since this could dam-age the electronic components.Only have tyres changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! Position a suitable jack only on the jack-ing points intended for this purpose. Raisethe vehicle for a short time only to changethe wheel. Make sure the vehicle is on asuitable surface and that no-one is in thevehicle. Secure the vehicle using chocksand apply the parking brake.

Interchanging front and rear wheels or tiresof differing dimensions can render the gen-eral operating permit invalid.

Rules for selecting new tyres

! For safety reasons, smart recommendsthat you only use tyres and wheels whichhave been specifically approved by smartfor your vehicle. These are specially adap-ted to the control systems, such as ABS orESP®.Only use tyres and wheels specificallytested and approved by smart. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehiclenoise emissions or fuel consumption, mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addi-tion, when driving with a load, dimen-sional variations and different tyre defor-mation characteristics could cause thetyres to make contact with the bodyworkand axle components. This could result indamage to the tyres or the vehicle.smart accepts no liability for damageresulting from the use of tyres or wheelsother than those tested and approved.Information on wheels and tyres can beobtained at a qualified specialist work-shop, e.g. a smart centre.

Changing a wheel 151

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

The service life of tyres depends on variousfactors, including the following:

RDriving styleRTyre pressureRMileageObserve the following rules for selecting newtyres:

RObserve country-specific regulationswhich stipulate or recommend a certaintyre type for the vehicle.ROnly fit tyres and wheels of the same type

and make.ROnly tyres of the same size may be used on

a single axle (left/right).ROnly use tyres of the same type (summer

tyres, all-season tyres, winter tyres).RUse only wheel-tyre combinations

approved by smart.RDo not wear tyres out too much. This oth-

erwise significantly reduces the tractionon wet roads (aquaplaning).RReplace tyres after six years at the latest.

i Recommended tyre pressures for variousoperating states can be found on the tyrepressure table on the driver's side doorpillar (B-pillar).

You can find further information regardingtyres and wheels at specialist tyre retailers,at qualified specialist workshops and at anysmart centre.

Preparing to change a wheel

The vehicle tool tray is located under theglove compartment.

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Position the front wheels to point straight

ahead.X Shift the transmission to position j.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the key from ignition lock.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Removing a wheel

G WARNING

If you do not position the jack correctly atthe appropriate jacking point of the vehi-cle, the jack could tip over with the vehicleraised. There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.The threads of the wheel bolts and wheelhubs could otherwise be damaged whenthe bolts are tightened.

! Position a suitable jack only on the jack-ing points intended for this purpose.Never position the jack on the high-volt-age battery. Do not jack up the vehicle onthe high-voltage battery. There is other-wise a risk of damaging the high-voltagebattery.Also observe the notes in the "Changing awheel" section.

Warning stickers

152 Changing a wheel>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

X Using both hands, grasp two hub capopenings and remove the hub cap.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub cap cover:

X Remove the hub cap cover.

X Using wheel wrench : loosen the wheelbolts by about one turn. Do not unscrew thewheel bolts completely.

The vehicle may only be raised at the desig-nated jacking points. These points ; arelocated in the front and the rear directly nextto the wheels. Do not position jack = on theedge of sill :. Otherwise, damage to thevehicle could occur.

X Position jack ; behind the triangularindentations for jacking point :.

X Set the foot of the jack up vertically withrespect to the jacking point on the vehicle.

X Raise the vehicle using the jack until thetyre is a maximum of 3 cm off the ground.

X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Fitting a wheel

G WARNING

The wheels could work loose if the wheelnuts and bolts are not tightened to thespecified tightening torque. There is a riskof accident.

Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

G WARNING

If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack couldtip over. There is a risk of injury.

Changing a wheel 153

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! When changing a wheel, use only wheelbolts that have been approved for thewheel rim and vehicle.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in "Changing a wheel"(Y page 151).

Fit tyres with a specified direction of rota-tion only according to their direction of rota-tion. An arrow on the sidewall of the tyreindicates its correct direction of rotation.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Push the wheel onto the wheel hub andpress it on.

X Screw in the wheel bolts and tighten themslightly.

X Lower the vehicle all the way.X Remove the jack.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a cross-

wise pattern in sequence indicated :

to ?. The tightening torque must be105 Nm.

X Check the recommended tyre pressure andadjust if necessary.

i Vehicles with tyre pressure control sys-tem: all fitted wheels must be equippedwith functioning sensors.

Vehicles with steel wheels and hub caps:

X Fit hub cap A such that valve B does notbecome trapped.

X Press the hub cap evenly onto the wheelwith both hands until you hear the hub capengage.

X Check to make sure the hub cap is seatedsecurely on the wheel.

Vehicle with steel wheels and wheel hub cov-ers:

X Fit the hub cap cover.

Storing wheels

X Store wheels in a cool, dry and dark placewhen not in use.

X Protect against oil, grease and fuel.

Using the tyre pressure monitor

Useful information

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyrepressure to the recommended cold tyre pres-sure suitable for the operating situation.The tyre pressure monitor issues a warningwhen the pressure drops in one or more of thetyres.The tyre pressure monitor works properlyonly if sensors are present in all four tyres,

154 Using the tyre pressure monitor>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

and after the monitor has learned the correcttyre pressure for the current operating sit-uation. This occurs automatically in mostsituations, but may also be specified afterrestarting the tyre pressure monitor. Beforerestarting, check the tyres for the recom-mended tyre pressure.The tyre pressure monitor does not provide awarning in the following cases:

REven loss of pressure on multiple tyresRSudden loss of tyre pressure, e.g. due to

penetration by a foreign bodyRIncorrectly set tyre pressureThe tyre pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating a pressure loss or malfunction.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor(on-board computer with a mono-chrome display)

X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to therecommended value.

X On the multifunction lever press the ´button repeatedly until the ° and hsymbols are displayed in the instrumentcluster display.

X Press and hold the a button on the mul-tifunction lever.The ° and h symbols will flash inthe instrument cluster display for about5 seconds. The two symbols then light up.

The tyre pressure monitor is restarted.

Restarting the tyre pressure monitor(on-board computer with colour dis-play)

X Set the tyre pressure of all tyres to therecommended value.

X Select Settings > Tyre pressure monitorin the on-board computer.The Tyre pressure monitor Adopt cur‐rent pressures as new reference val‐ues? message appears in the display.

X Select yes and press a to confirm.The display shows the Tyre pressure monitor restarted message.

If the Tyre pressure monitor restartedmessage does not appear after 5 seconds,repeat the tyre pressure monitor restart.

Checking the tyre pressures

Please note

G WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tyres posethe following risks:

Rthe tyres may burst, especially as theload and vehicle speed increase.

Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impairtyre traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.


Observe the recommended tyre pressureand check the tyre pressure of all the tyres:

Rat least every two weeks

Rwhen the load changes

Rbefore embarking on a longer journey

Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

G WARNING

If you mount unsuitable accessories ontotyre valves, the tyre valves may be over-loaded and malfunction, which can causetyre pressure loss. Aftermarket tyre pres-sure monitoring systems will cause thetyre valve to remain open. This can alsoresult in tyre pressure loss. There is a riskof an accident.

Only screw standard valve caps or valvecaps specifically approved by smart foryour vehicle onto the tyre valve.

G WARNING

If the tyre pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tyre may be damaged. Tyre

Checking the tyre pressures 155

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

pressure that is too low may result in a tyreblow-out. There is a risk of accident.

RCheck the tyre for foreign objects.

RCheck whether the wheel is losing air orthe valve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.


Check the tyre pressure regularly, at leastevery 14 days.

The table with the recommended tyre pres-sure for various operating conditions can befound on the driver's side door pillar(B-pillar).The tyre pressure table may also state airpressures for different load conditions.These are defined in the table as differentnumbers of passengers and amounts of lug-gage. The actual number of seats may differfrom this.If a tyre size precedes a tyre pressure, thetyre pressure information following is onlyvalid for that tyre size. If tyre sizes are notspecified, the tyre pressures stated on thetyre pressure table apply for all approvedtyres.

Checking and correcting the tyre pres-sure manually

Only check the tyre pressure once the tyreshave cooled down.

X Drive the vehicle less than 2 km.X Park the vehicle away from direct sunlight

for at least three hours.

X Check the tyre pressure with a suitabletyre pressure gauge.

X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.X Restart tyre pressure monitor.

Using winter tyres

G WARNING

M+S tyres with a tyre tread depth of lessthan 4 mm are not suitable for use in winteras they do not provide sufficient traction.There is a risk of accident.

M+S tyres with a tread depth of less than4 mm must be replaced.

At temperatures below +7 †, summer tyreslose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tyres on yourvehicle therefore to winter tyres or all-sea-son tyres marked with M+S. Using summertyres at very cold temperatures could causetears to form, thereby damaging the tyrespermanently. smart cannot accept responsi-bility for this type of damage.Have the vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.

X At low temperatures, use only winter tyresmarked with M+S.

X When road conditions are wintry, useM+S tyres with the additional i snow-flake symbol.These tyres allow driving safety systems,e.g. ABS, to function optimally in the win-ter.

X Use M+S tyres of the same make and treadon all wheels.

X When driving with M+S tyres, observe thespecified maximum permissible speed.

X Use only tyre types and sizes approved forsmart.

X When using tyres with a specified direc-tion of rotation, observe the arrow on thesidewall indicating the tyre's direction ofrotation.

156 Using winter tyres>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

After fitting M+S tyres:

X Check tyre pressure.X Restart tyre pressure monitor.X If M+S tyres with a lower maximum per-

missible speed than that of the vehicle arefitted, affix an appropriate warning labelin the driver's field of vision. Using thelimiter, restrict the speed to the maximumpermissible speed for M+S tyres.

Using snow chains

G WARNING

If you have fitted snow chains to the frontwheels, they may scrape against the vehi-cle body or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tyres.There is a risk of an accident.

To avoid hazardous situations:

Rnever fit snow chains on the front wheels

Rfit snow chains to the rear wheels inpairs.

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you fit snowchains on steel wheels, you may damagethe hub caps. Remove the hub caps fromthe relevant wheels before fitting the snowchains.

For safety reasons, smart recommends thatyou only use snow chains that have beenspecially approved for your vehicle by smart.Further information can be obtained at asmart centre or a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Observe country-specific regulations.X Use only snow chains approved for smart.X Fit snow chains on both rear wheels.X Use snow chains only on snow-covered

roads.X When driving with snow chains fitted, do

not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 50 km/h.

Changing the window wiper blades

Please note

G WARNING

If the windscreen wipers begin to movewhile you are changing the wiper blades,you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Thereis a risk of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipersand ignition before changing the wiperblades.

! Never open the service cover or tailgate ifa wiper arm has been folded away from thewindscreen or rear window. Never fold awiper arm without a wiper blade back ontothe windscreen or rear window. Hold thewiper arm firmly when you change thewiper blade. If you release the wiper armwithout a wiper blade and it falls onto thewindow, the window may be damaged bythe force of the impact.

Changing the window wiper blades onthe windscreen

X Fold the wiper arm away from the wind-screen.

X Press release clips ; on mounting ? inthe direction of windscreen 3. The catchtab is released from the mounting and thewindow wiper blades can be removed fromthe wiper arm.

X Slide window wiper blade : in the direc-tion of arrow 5 until the securing hook forthe window wiper blade is revealed.

X Remove the window wiper blade.

Changing the window wiper blades 157

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

X Slide new window wiper blade : in thedirection of arrow 4 onto mounting = ofwiper arm ;.The window wiper blade snaps into place.

X Check that the window wiper blade is posi-tioned correctly.

X Carefully fold wiper arm ; onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear window wiper blade(smart fortwo coupé)

X Remove key from ignition lock.X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear win-

dow until you hear it engage.X Unscrew window wiper blade ; in the

direction of the arrow until it is releasedfrom the retainer on the wiper arm.

X Pull out window wiper blade ;.X Press new window wiper blade ; onto

wiper arm : until it engages.X Check that window wiper blade ; is posi-

tioned correctly.X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear win-

dow.

Cleaning the vehicle

Useful information

Regular care maintains the appearance andquality of the vehicle over time.Observe the following when cleaning andcaring for the vehicle:

X Do not clean the engine.X Do not clean the vehicle whilst charging.X Use soft, moist cloths.X Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended and approved by smart.X Do not use acidic cleaning agents.X In winter, carefully remove road salt as

soon as possible.

Cleaning the vehicle exterior

Washing in an automatic car wash orwashing by hand

Preparing the vehicle for cleaning

G WARNING

Braking efficiency is reduced after thevehicle has been washed. There is a risk ofan accident.

After washing the vehicle, brake carefullywhile paying attention to the traffic con-ditions in order to restore full braking effi-ciency.

X Close the side windows completely.X Switch off the climate control blower.X Turn the windscreen wipers to position 0.

Notes on care of matt paintwork

! The following can give the paint a glossyappearance and thus reduce the matteffect:

RRubbing hard with unsuitable agentsRWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Only use automatic car washes whichcorrespond to the latest technologicalstandards. Never use wash programswhich finish by treating the vehicle withhot wax.

158 Cleaning the vehicle>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or pol-ishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax, for the purpose of paintwork care.These products are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles withmatt paintwork leads to considerable sur-face damage or, more specifically, to shiny,spotted areas.Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing makes the paintworkshiny.

If your vehicle has a clear matt finish,observe these notes. By doing so, you canavoid paintwork damage due to incorrecthandling.

Washing in the automatic car washX Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.X Remove excess dirt.X Drive through the automatic car wash.X Remove wax from the front windscreen and

the wiper blades.

i If the windscreen wipers leave smearsafter the vehicle has passed through thecar wash, this may be caused by wax orother residue. This residue can be removedwith washer fluid.

Washing by handX Locate a washing bay equipped for hand-

washing.X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.X Apply mild cleaning agent with a soft

vehicle sponge.X Thoroughly hose the vehicle with a gentle

jet of water; do not point the water jetdirectly towards the air inlet grille.

X Dry the vehicle off with a chamois.

Cleaning with a high-pressure cleaner

G WARNING

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirtgrinders) can cause damage not visiblefrom the outside to tyres or chassis com-ponents. Components damaged in this waycan unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of anaccident.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners withcircular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-nents replaced immediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least30 cm between the vehicle and the high-pressure cleaner nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is availablefrom the equipment manufacturer.Move the high-pressure cleaner nozzlearound when cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:

RtyresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

X Prepare the vehicle for cleaning.X Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm

between the high-pressure cleaner nozzleand the vehicle.

X Keep moving the nozzle whilst cleaning.

Cleaning the reversing camera

X Clean camera lens : with water and a softcloth.

Cleaning the vehicle 159

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Cleaning the sensors

: Active Brake Assist sensor; Parking aid sensors

X Clean sensors with water, car shampoo anda soft cloth.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNING

The water jet of circular-jet nozzles (dirtgrinders) can cause damage not visiblefrom the outside to tyres or chassis com-ponents. Components damaged in this waycan unexpectedly fail. There is a risk of anaccident.

Do not use high-pressure cleaners withcircular-jet nozzles to clean the vehicle.Have damaged tyres or chassis compo-nents replaced immediately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning prod-ucts to remove brake dust. This could dam-age wheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park up your vehicle for a longperiod of time immediately after cleaning,particularly after cleaning the wheel rimwith wheel cleaner. Wheel cleaner maylead to increased corrosion of the brakediscs and pads. You should therefore drivefor a few minutes after cleaning. By heat-ing up the brakes, the brake discs and pads

dry. The vehicle can then be parked up fora long period of time.

X Clean the wheels with an acid-free clean-ing agent.

Cleaning the windows and windscreenwipers

Cleaning the windows

G WARNING

If the windscreen wipers are set in motionwhen cleaning the windscreen or wiperblades, you could become trapped. There isa danger of injury.

Always switch off the windscreen wipersand the ignition before cleaning the wind-screen or wiper blades.

X Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi-tion and fold them away from the window.

X Clean the inside and outside of the win-dows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent recommended by smart.

X Clear deposits regularly from the wind-screen and rear window to ensure thatwater can drain unhindered.

Cleaning the window wiper bladesX Place the wiper arms in the vertical posi-

tion and fold them away from the window.X Clean the window wiper blades with a soft

cloth.X Fold the wiper arms back into place.

Cleaning the panoramic roof (smart fortwocoupé)

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticpanes of the panorama roof. Do not usecleaning agents containing solvents

X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic win-dows and wipe off with a moist sponge.

160 Cleaning the vehicle>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

Cleaning the roof

Dry cleaningX Brush from the front to the back using a

soft brush.

Wet cleaningX Dry clean first.X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and

lukewarm water.X Rinse with clean water.

Cleaning the soft top (smart fortwo cab-rio)

Useful information

! Never clean the soft top using a high-pressure cleaner as water could otherwiseenter the vehicle interior.

! Only clean the folding roof and the rearsoft top when they are closed.

Dry cleaningX Brush from the front to the back using a

soft brush.

Wet cleaningX Dry clean first.X Wash down with a soft brush or sponge and

lukewarm water.X Rinse with clean water.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

X Apply mild cleaning agent for plastic len-ses and wipe off with a wet sponge.

Cleaning and caring for paintwork

! Do not affix stickers to the painted sur-face. Adhesive residue could damage thepaintwork.

X Remove impurities immediately by rub-bing carefully.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.

X Use silicone remover to remove wax.X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,

oils, fuels and greases by rubbing care-fully with a cloth soaked in petroleumether or lighter fluid.

Cleaning the vehicle interior

Cleaning the displays

! For cleaning, do not use any of the fol-lowing:

Ralcohol-based thinner or petrolRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household

cleaning agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead to irrepar-able damage to the display.

X Switch off the display and let it cool down.X Clean the display surface with a microfibre

cloth and cleaner for TFT/LC displays.X Dry the display surface using a dry micro-

fibre cloth.

Cleaning the steering wheel and theselector lever

X Wipe off with a moist cloth, or use a leathercare agent recommended by smart.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNING

Seat belts may be severely weakened ifbleached or coloured. This may lead to theseat belts, for example, tearing or failing inan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury, possibly even fatal.

Never bleach or colour seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemi-cal cleaning agents. Do not dry the seatbelts at temperatures above 80 † or indirect sunlight.

X Clean the seat belts using only lukewarmsoapy water.

Cleaning the vehicle 161

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Cleaning and caring for seats

Please note

! Do not use microfibre cloths to clean gen-uine leather or artificial leather covers, asthese are too aggressive and, if used often,may damage the cover.

Regular care maintains the appearance andfeel of the seats over time.

Cleaning and caring for genuine leatherseat coversX Wet a cloth with water and clean the seat

covers. Do not allow the leather to becomesoaked.

X Wipe off with a dry cloth.X Apply a leather care agent recommended

by smart.

Cleaning synthetic leather seat coversX Wet a cloth with detergent water and clean

the seat covers.

Cleaning cloth seat coversX Wet a microfibre cloth with detergent

water.X Rub cloth covers with care, cleaning entire

sections of the cover.X Allow the seat to dry.

Cleaning DINAMICA seat coversX Wet a cloth with water.X Clean entire sections of the cover.

Cleaning the trim

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNING

Care products and cleaning agents con-taining solvents can cause surfaces in thecockpit to become porous. This could resultin plastic parts breaking away when theairbags are deployed. There is a danger ofinjury.

Do not use care products and cleaningagents containing solvents to clean thecockpit.

! Never attach the following to plastic sur-faces:

RstickersRfilmsRperfume oil container or similarYou could otherwise damage the plastic.

To maintain the appearance of high-qualityplastic surfaces, do not allow surfaces tocome into contact with cosmetics, insectrepellents or sun creams.

X Clean the plastic trim with a damp cloth.X Use care products and cleaning agents

recommended by smart to remove heavysoiling.

Cleaning the roof lining (smart fortwocoupé)X Remove heavy soiling using a soft brush or

a cleaning agent recommended by smart.

Cleaning the carpetsX Use carpet and textile cleaning agents rec-

ommended by smart.

Cleaning the trim elements

! Do not use solvent-based cleaningagents such as tar remover, wheel clean-ers, polishes or waxes. There is otherwise arisk of damaging the surface.

X Clean the trim elements with a moistmicrofibre cloth.

X Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended by smart to remove heavysoiling.

Observing service due dates

The ¯ and ° indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster display are reminders ofupcoming service due dates:

R¯: minor service.R°: major service.Monochrome display: the indicator lampflashes for a few seconds after the engine isstarted. Depending on the operating condi-tions of the vehicle, the time or distanceremaining until the service is due, is alsodisplayed.

162 Observing service due dates>>

Mai

nte

nan

ce a

nd

car

e.

The service interval is based on normal oper-ation of the vehicle. Observe the following ifthe vehicle is operated under arduous con-ditions or increased loads, e.g. regular citydriving with frequent intermediate stops:

X Carry out service work more often thanspecified by the service interval.

X Check the tyres more frequently.

Current information on the type of servicecan be obtained at a smart centre or a quali-fied specialist workshop.

Parking up the vehicle

! Please note that if the vehicle is not usedfor prolonged periods, vehicle damage mayoccur and the battery may discharge orbecome damaged.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop for aconsultation.

Parking up the vehicle 163

>> M

ain

ten

ance

an

d c

are.

Z

Securing the vehicle in the event of anaccident or a breakdown

Securing the vehicle

! When a tyre is damaged, the danger areamust be kept clear of all persons.

X Stop the vehicle away from traffic on solid,non-slippery ground.

X Switch on the hazard warning lights.X Turn the front wheels to the straight-

ahead position.X Switch off the engine.X Passengers should leave the vehicle.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Set up the warning triangle.

In the event of a flat tyre, without TIREFIT thevehicle cannot be made roadworthy againusing the on-board equipment. No emer-gency call can be made via the smart Audio-System. The vehicle owner and the driver ofthe vehicle are responsible for equipping thevehicle with an appropriate breakdown kitand seeking assistance in the event of abreakdown.

Switching the hazard warning lamps onand off

When the hazard warning lamps areswitched on, all the turn signal lamps flash.The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on in the following cases:

Ran airbag is deployed.Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a

speed of above 70 km/h and comes to astandstill.

The hazard warning lamps switch off auto-matically if a speed of 10 km/h is exceededagain after full brake application.

X To switch on the hazard warning lampsmanually: press button :.

Operating the emergency assistancesystem

Useful information

For Russia only:The emergency assistance system is there torescue you and others in an emergency.Should the driver arrive at the scene of anaccident, or feel unwell, an emergency callcan be initiated. The emergency call must notbe deployed in the case of a breakdown or asimilar, non-dangerous situation.The emergency assistance system can helpto radically reduce the time between an acci-dent and the arrival of the emergency serv-ices. The requirement is a stable mobilephone connection; network coverage candepend on the region.If there is no safety risk, in the event of anaccident the vehicle occupants shouldremain in the vehicle after initiating anemergency call.The emergency assistance system has a sep-arate battery. The battery only functionswithin a temperature range of -20 † to 85 †.The battery must be replaced every fouryears. Always have work on the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Method of operation

After an emergency call has been initiated,the emergency call centre will ascertain ifassistance is required on location.

164 Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

In the event of an emergency, accident datais forwarded to a public emergency callcentre. The data transferred includes:RGPS/GLONASS position dataRDirection of travelRTime of initiationThis allows measures for rescue, recovery ortowing away to be initiated quickly.The emergency assistance system consists ofa loudspeaker, the control panel and the tel-ecommunication system. The control panel islocated in the overhead control panel.

: Automatic emergency call indicator lamp; Microphone= SOS button? Call and reception status indicator lamp

Using test mode

In test mode, the driver can check if theemergency assistance system is working. Todo this, a voice message from the driver isrecorded and the test result is transmitted tothe emergency call centre.

X Briefly press SOS button = several timeswithin five seconds.

X Wait fort 25 seconds.X Briefly press SOS button = three times

within ten seconds.A tone sounds. The microphone records forten seconds.

X Speak any message.A signal sounds after 25 seconds. Therecorded message is played back via theloudspeaker.

X If the voice message is correctly playedback, press and hold SOS button = for fiveseconds.Indicator lamp ? flashes green slowly.

orX If the voice message is incorrectly played

back or not played back at all, press SOSbutton = three times within three sec-onds.Indicator lamp ? flashes red slowly forfive seconds.

Automatic emergency call

Indicator lamp : shows if an automaticemergency call can be initiated.If airbags are deployed, the emergencyassistance system automatically notifies anemergency centre.

i The automatic emergency call is opera-tional as standard.

Triggering an emergency call manually

Manually initiating an emergency call as aperson involved in an accident:

X Press and hold SOS button = for three sec-onds.An emergency call is made.

Manually initiating an emergency call afterwitnessing an accident:

X Press SOS button = five times within tenseconds.The emergency call centre is informed ofthe accident.

Securing the vehicle in the event of an accident or a breakdown 165

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Securing the vehicle against rollingaway

Securing on level ground

X When changing a wheel, place chocks orother suitable items under the front andrear of the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site the wheel you wish to change.

Securing on a downhill gradient

X Place wheel chocks or other suitable itemsin front of the wheels of the front and rearaxle.

Using the warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangle : is secured behind thedriver's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener.

X Fold the driver's seat forwards.X Remove warning triangle :.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold feet 3 out to the side.X Pull side reflectors 2 upwards to form a

triangle.X Connect the reflectors using upper stud1.

X Place the warning triangle at a suitabledistance.

Removing the first-aid kit

i Check the expiry date on the first-aid kitat least once a year. Replace the contents ifnecessary, and replace any missing parts.

166 Removing the first-aid kit>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

First-aid kit : is secured behind the driv-er's seat backrest with a Velcro fastener.Return it to this location after use.

X Fold the driver's seat forwards.X Remove first-aid kit :.

Removing the fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is located underneaththe front passenger seat.

Removing the vehicle tool tray

The towing eye and the TIREFIT kit are loca-ted in the vehicle tool tray under the glovecompartment.

X Remove bolts in the front-passenger foot-well.

X Remove the vehicle tool tray.

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit

Useful information

The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.TIREFIT is a tyre sealant. TIREFIT is used toseal punctures of up to 4 mm, particularlythose in the tyre tread, at outside tempera-tures down to Ò20 †.

Please note

G WARNING

In the following situations, the tyre seal-ant is unable to provide sufficient break-down assistance, as it is unable to seal thetyre properly:

Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tyrelarger than those mentioned above.

Rthe wheel rim is damaged.

Ryou have driven at very low tyre pres-sures or on a flat tyre.


Do not drive any further. Contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

G WARNING

The tyre sealant is harmful and causesirritation. It must not come into contactwith your skin, eyes or clothing or be swal-lowed. Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keeptyre sealant away from children. There is arisk of injury.

If you come into contact with the tyre seal-ant, observe the following:

RRinse off the tyre sealant from your skinimmediately with water.

RIf the tyre sealant comes into contactwith your eyes, immediately rinse themthoroughly with clean water.

RIf tyre sealant is swallowed, immedi-ately rinse your mouth out thoroughlyand drink plenty of water. Do not inducevomiting, and seek medical attentionimmediately.

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 167

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

RImmediately change out of clothingwhich has come into contact with tyresealant.

RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek med-ical attention immediately.

G WARNING

A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and isnot suitable for higher speeds. There is arisk of accident.

You should therefore adapt your drivingstyle accordingly and drive carefully. Donot exceed the specified maximum speedwith a tyre that has been repaired usingtyre sealant.

The maximum permissible speed for a tyresealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h.

! After use, excess tyre sealant may run outof the filler hose. This could cause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plas-tic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit.


Have the used tyre sealant bottle disposedof professionally, e.g. at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Comply with the manufacturer's safetyinstructions on the sticker on the tyre infla-tion compressor.

Filling with tyre sealant

X Leave foreign bodies which have penetra-ted the tyre in the tyre.

X Remove the vehicle tool tray.X Remove the TIREFIT kit, consisting of a

tyre sealant bottle and a tyre inflationcompressor, from the vehicle tool kit.

X Affix the 80 km/h maximum speed sticker tothe instrument cluster within the driver'sfield of vision.

X Unwind plug : with the cable from tyreinflation compressor ;.

X Remove hose A from the bottom section oftyre inflation compressor ;.

X Unscrew the cap from tyre sealant bot-tle ?.

X Connect hose A.

X Remove valve flap from valve E on thefaulty tyre.

X Unscrew cap from filler hose =.X Screw filler hose = onto valve E.X Insert connector : into the cigarette

lighter socket or the 12 V socket.X Turn the key to position 1 in the ignition

lock.X Press on/off switch B on tyre inflation

compressor ; to position 1.The tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre.The pressure may briefly rise to approx-imately 600 kPa (6.0 bar/86 psi) in pressuregauge C.

i Preventing damage to the tyre inflationcompressor

168 Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

Do not switch off the tyre inflation com-pressor during this phase.

X Let the tyre inflation compressor run for amaximum of 15 minutes, then allow it tocool down.

The tyre pressure must be at least 180 kPa(1.8 bar/26 psi) in pressure gauge C.Allow any leaking tyre sealant to dry. It canthen be removed like a layer of film.Have any clothing stained with tyre sealantcleaned as soon as possible with perchloro-ethylene.

Further procedure if the pressure of thesealed tyre is below 180 kPa

G WARNING

If the specified tyre pressure still cannotbe reached, the tyre is too badly damaged.The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre inthis instance. Damaged tyres and low tyrepressures can significantly impair thevehicle's braking and driving character-istics. There is a risk of an accident.

Do not drive any further. Contact a quali-fied specialist workshop.

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of

the defective tyre.Please note that tyre sealant may escapewhen unscrewing.

X Slow move the vehicle approximately 10 mforwards or backwards.

X Pump up the tyre again.After a maximum of 15 minutes, the tyrepressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi).

Further procedure if the pressure of thesealed tyre is at least 180 kPa

X Switch off the tyre inflation compressor.X Unscrew the hose from the valve of the

defective tyre.Please note that tyre sealant may escapewhen unscrewing.

X Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyreinflation compressor.

X Perform a test drive.The maximum permissible speed for a tyresealed with tyre sealant is 80 km/h.

X Stop after driving for approximately 3 kmand check the tyre pressure with the tyreinflation compressor.The tyre pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). The precise valuesare located on the door pillar (B-pillar) onthe driver's side.

X If necessary, adjust the tyre pressure.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve on

the sealed tyre.Please note that tyre sealant may escapewhen unscrewing.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve of thesealed tyre.

X Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyreinflation compressor. The filler hose stayson the tyre sealant bottle.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tyre changed there.

X Have the tyre sealant bottle and filler hosereplaced as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Adjusting the tyre pressure

Increasing the tyre pressure

X Switch on the tyre inflation compressor.X Observe the display.

Reducing the tyre pressure

Sealing tyres using the TIREFIT kit 169

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

X Press button : next to pressure gauge ;.

i Even unused tyre sealant loses its effec-tiveness over time.Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Towing the vehicle

Please note

G WARNING

Safety relevant functions are restricted orno longer available if:

Rthe ignition is switched off

Rthe brake system or power steering ismalfunctioning

Rthere is a malfunction in the voltagesupply or the vehicle's electrical system.

When your vehicle is towed, you mayrequire considerably more effort to steerand brake. There is a risk of an accident.

In such cases use a rigid towing bar. Beforetowing away, make sure the steeringmoves freely.

G WARNING

If the steering wheel lock is engaged, thevehicle can no longer be steered. There is arisk of an accident.

Always switch on the ignition when towingwith a tow rope or a towing bar.

G WARNING

When towing or tow-starting anothervehicle and its weight is greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle,the:

Rtowing eye may be torn off

Rcar/trailer combination may swerve oreven overturn


When towing or tow-starting anothervehicle, its weight should not be greater

than the permissible gross weight of yourvehicle.

Information on the vehicle's permissiblegross mass can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 200).

! Observe the following points when tow-ing with a tow rope:

Rsecure the tow rope on the same side onboth vehicles.Rmake sure that the tow rope is not longer

than legally permitted. Mark the towrope in the middle, e.g. with a white cloth(30 x 30 cm). This makes other road usersaware that a vehicle is being towed.Ronly secure the tow rope to the towing

eye.Robserve the brake lamps of the towing

vehicle while driving. Always maintaina distance so that the tow rope does notsag.Rdo not use steel cables or chains to tow

your vehicle. You could otherwise dam-age the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with acrane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! You may tow the vehicle for a maximum of50km. A towing speed of 50 km/h must notbe exceeded.For towing distances over 50 km, the entirevehicle must be lifted up and transported.

Observe the legal requirements for the rele-vant countries when towing.Always have the vehicle transported in thefollowing cases:

RThe warning lamp lights up and Do not tow vehicle with wheels on groundappears in the display of the instrumentcluster.RThe multifunction display is not working.ROne of more of the following warning lamps

is lit up:- þ drive diagnostics (red)- # 12 V battery

170 Towing the vehicle>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

RThe brake pedal begins to pulsate as soonas the towing procedure commences.RThe vehicle must be moved over a long dis-

tance.The transmission must be in position iwhen the vehicle is being towed.

i Before the vehicle is towed, switch off theautomatic locking feature. The drivercould otherwise be locked out when push-ing or having the vehicle towed.

i Vehicles with the basic carrier fitted:Do not tow the vehicle with the basic car-rier fitted.Do not secure the tow rope or tow bar to thebasic carrier.

Observe the notes on the selector lever whentowing the vehicle.

Fitting the towing eye

The towing eye can be attached to the front orrear of the vehicle.

X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool tray.

X Carefully prise off cover : on the vehicle.X Screw in the towing eye to the stop.

Towing the vehicle with both axles onthe ground

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion i.The selector lever lock can be manuallyreleased in the event of an electrical mal-function.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lights.

Transporting the vehicle

! Only secure the vehicle by the wheels orrims, not by parts of the vehicle such as theaxle or steering components. Otherwisethe vehicle could be damaged.

X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock. Shift the transmission to position i.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:

X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position j.X Remove the key.X Lash down the vehicle.

Removing the towing eye

X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach the cover to the recess at the top

and engage it at the bottom.X Stow the towing eye in the vehicle tool

tray.

Towing the vehicle 171

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

Manually releasing the selector leverlock

In cases of an electrical fault the selectorlever lock can be manually deactivated, e.g.if the parking lock has been deactivated fortowing and should subsequently be re-applied.

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toprise out the cover from the centre console.Otherwise, the cover or the centre consolecould be damaged.

X Apply the parking brake.X Open the drawer on the front-passenger

side.X Prise out cover : on the centre console

from bottom edge ; using with a flat,blunt object.

X Pull cover : in the direction of the arrow.

X Pull yellow release = behind the trim upand simultaneously press release but-ton ? on the selector lever.

X Shift the gear selector lever to position ior j.

Replacing the bulbs

Please note

G WARNING

Bulbs, lamps and plug connectors canbecome very hot during use. When replac-ing a bulb, you could burn yourself onthese components. There is a risk of injury.

Allow these components to cool downbefore replacing the bulb.

Observe the following rules when replacingbulbs:

ROnly replace bulbs when the engine isswitched off.RDo not use bulbs that have been dropped or

show signs of visible damage, e.g.scratches.RDo not touch the glass bulb with your bare

hands.ROnly use bulbs in enclosed lamps designed

for that purpose.ROnly fit spare bulbs of the same type and

with a specified voltage.RDo not allow bulbs to come into contact

with moisture.RHave LEDs changed at qualified specialist

workshops only.Change only the bulbs described below your-self in accordance with the specified bulbtypes.

Replacing front bulbs

Changing dipped-beam and main-beamheadlamps

172 Replacing the bulbs>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

X Switch off the lights.X Open the service cover.X Remove cover :.X Pull out the connector.X Press retainer ; inwards and to the left.X Pull the bulb out.X Insert the new bulb.X Lock retainer ;.X Insert the connector.X Replace and engage cap :.

Replacing the front turn signal lamps

X Switch off the lights.X Turn the respective front wheel inwards.X Push clamp : downwards.X Remove cover ; upwards.X Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise and

remove it.X Remove the bulb from the bulb holder.X Insert the new bulb.X Insert the bulb holder and turn it clock-

wise until it engages.X Insert and engage cover ;.

Replacing the side turn signal lamps

X Carefully insert a flat tool into recess :.X Prise out side turn signal ;.X Unscrew the bulb from the bulb holder.X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.X Refit side turn signal ;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Replacing the tail lamp bulbs

Tail lamps without partial LEDs

: Rear/brake lamp; Rear fog lamp= Reversing lamp? Turn signals

Replacing the bulbs 173

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

Tail lamps with partial LEDs

: Turn signals; Reversing lamp

Removing the tail lamp cover

X Switch off the lights.X smart fortwo coupé: open the upper and

lower tailgate.X smart fortwo cabrio: open the lower tail-

gate.X smart fortwo cabrio: fold the rear soft top

up.X Loosen screws :.X Remove the tail lamp.X Carefully insert a flat tool under the plas-

tic hanger on the tail lamp.X Lift the connector and remove it.

Replacing a faulty tail lamp bulb

: Rear lamp/brake lamp (vehicles withoutpartial LEDs)

; Turn signals= Reversing lamp? Rear fog lamp (vehicles without partial

LEDs)

X Release four tabs A on the bulb holder.X Remove the bulb holder.X Pull the faulty bulb out.X Insert the new bulb.X Refit the bulb holder.X Insert the connector.X Insert the tail lamp until you hear it

engage.X Tighten the screws on the tail lamp.

Replacing the licence plate lighting

X Insert a flat tool into recess :.X Remove the cover from the licence plate

lamp.X Remove the bulb from the holder.X Insert the new bulb into the holder.X Insert the lamp lens into the licence plate

lamp.

174 Replacing the bulbs>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

Replacing the interior lighting

X Insert a flat tool into the recess.X Prise out lamp lens :.X Remove the bulb from the holder.X Insert the new bulb into the holder.X Refit the lamp lens.

Changing fuses

Please note

G WARNING

If you manipulate, bridge or replace afaulty fuse with a fuse of a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloa-ded. This may result in a fire. There is a riskof an accident and injury.

Always replace faulty fuses with specifiednew fuses of the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor smart vehicles and which have the cor-rect fuse rating for the system concerned.Components or systems could otherwise bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

The electrical fuses disconnect defective cir-cuits. If a fuse blows, all the connected com-ponents and their functions will fail.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognise bythe colour and fuse rating. The fuse ratingsare listed in the fuse allocation chart(Y page 203).

If new fuses blow, the cause for this must bediagnosed and rectified at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Preparing the vehicle to change a fuse

X Apply the parking brake.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the key to position u in the ignition

lock and remove it.X Check whether all indicator lamps in the

instrument cluster are off.

Replacing a fuse (left-hand drive vehi-cle)

! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the dash-board. You could damage the dashboard orthe cover.

X Open the front-passenger door.X Open the glove compartment.X To open: open cover : in the direction of

the arrow.X Replace the faulty fuse.X To close: insert and fold in cover : until it

engages.X Close the glove compartment.

Changing fuses 175

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

Replacing a fuse (right-hand drivevehicle)

X Open the driver’s door.X To open: turn quick-release fastener ; by

90° using a suitable object.X Fold down cover :.X Replace the faulty fuse.X To close: close cover :.X Close quick-release fastener ;.

Replacing the key battery

G WARNING

Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub-stances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.

Keep batteries out of the reach of children.If a battery is swallowed, seek medicalattention immediately.


Batteries contain pollu-tants. It is illegal to dis-pose of them with thehousehold rubbish. Theymust be collected sepa-rately and disposed of inan environmentallyresponsible recycling sys-tem.

Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally respon-sible manner. Take dis-

charged batteries to aqualified specialist work-shop or to a collectionpoint for used batteries.

X Fixed keys: unscrew screw :.

X Insert a flat tool, e.g. a coin, into the recess.X Turn the tool until the cover of the battery

tray opens.

X Replace battery ; with the positive ter-minal facing upwards.

X Replace the cover on the battery tray andpush it closed.

176 Replacing the key battery>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

X Fixed keys: screw in screw :.X Check the function of all key buttons.

Opening a door with the emergencyrelease

If the vehicle cannot be opened using theremote control key, the vehicle can be openedusing the emergency release.If the driver's door is unlocked and openedwith the key in the emergency release, theanti-theft alarm system will issue an alarm.To disable the alarm, switch on the ignition.

X Carefully remove the cover from the emer-gency release.

X Insert the key into the emergency releaseon the driver's door.

X Turn the key anti-clockwise.X Remove the key from the lock.X Push the cover into the emergency release

until it engages.X Open the door.X To disable the alarm from the anti-theft

alarm system: switch on the ignition.

On right-hand-drive vehicles, the emer-gency release is located on the front-passenger door.

Locking the doors in an emergency

Locking the doors with the locking but-ton

X Open the driver’s door.X Close the other doors and the tailgate.X Press and hold button :. An audible lock-

ing and unlocking sound can be heard.Wait until the third (locking) sound, beforereleasing button :.

X Leave the vehicle and close the driver'sdoor.The doors, tailgate and socket cap arelocked. The anti-theft alarm system isprimed.

X From the outside, check that the doors,tailgate and socket cap are locked.

Locking the doors with the emergencylocking

X Insert the key into slot : on the left door.X Turn the key towards the bonnet as far as it

will go to position 2.X Close the left door.

Locking the doors in an emergency 177

>> D

eali

ng

wit

h a

ccid

ents

an

d b

reak

dow

ns.

Z

X Repeat the procedure described above onthe right door.

X Check that the doors are locked.

i If you lock the vehicle using emergencylocking, the tailgate and socket cap are notlocked. The anti-theft alarm system is notprimed.

178 Locking the doors in an emergency>>

Dea

lin

g w

ith

acc

iden

ts a

nd

bre

akd

own

s.

Notes on display messages

The display shows warnings, malfunctionsor additional information. A warning tonealso sounds with some display messages.Messages from all categories can containimportant information that must beobserved. Have error messages checked at aMercedes-Benz Service Centre as soon aspossible. If an error message is not followedup with a repair, this can lead to damage thatis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty including injuries or materialdamage.

Display messages with graphic symbols aresimplified in the Owner's Manual and maydiffer from the symbols in the display.Colour display: low-priority display mes-sages can be hidden by pressing a on thesteering wheel. High-priority messages areshown in red. The display messages are thenstored in the message memory and can becalled up for as long as the ignition remainsswitched on. Switching off the ignition clearsthe message memory.

Locking and unlocking

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Key will not lock orunlock the vehicle.

A strong source of radio waves is interfering with the signal.

X Stand closer to the door lock and try to lock/unlock the vehicleagain.

Key battery is low or discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle with the key in the emergency release or lockthe vehicle with emergency locking.

X Replace the key battery.

Key is faulty.To lock:

X Press the locking button and close the door within five seconds.

The vehicle still will not lock.

X Lock driver's door using emergency locking.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

To unlock:

X Unlock vehicle with the key in the emergency release.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Key is lost. X Have the key deactivated or replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report loss of the key to vehicle insurer.

Warning tone sounds. Driver's door is opened while the engine is running.

Switch off the engine before leaving the vehicle:

X Apply the parking brake.X Select transmission position j.X Turn the key to position u in the ignition lock and remove it.

Locking and unlocking 179

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.


Side window will notclose or will not open orclose fully.

Objects are obstructing the window guide.

X Remove objects.

Side window is not reset.

G WARNING

While closing the side windows, body parts in the closing areacould become trapped. There is a risk of injury.

When closing make sure that no parts of the body are in theclosing area. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switchor press the switch to open the side window again.

X Close all doors.X Turn the key to position 2 in the ignition lock.X Pull the switch for closing the window until the window is

closed, and then push the switch for one second.

The side window opens again a little way.

X Repeat previous step until the window remains closed afterreleasing the switch.

C Red warning lampis lit.If the speed exceeds20 km/h, a warningtone also sounds.Colour display: the dis-play shows an opendoor/tailgate.

Door or tailgate is open.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Close all doors and the tailgate.

Visibility, occupants, airbags


Exterior mirror is notengaged.

The exterior mirror has been moved forwards or backwards byforce.

X Carefully move exterior mirror to the correct position.

Windscreen wipershave malfunctioned.

Windscreen wipers are obstructed, e.g. by snow.


X Remove the key from ignition lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windscreen wipers on again after 30 seconds.

180 Visibility, occupants, airbags>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


Windscreen wiper drive is malfunctioning.

X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Windscreen wiper willnot stop or alwayswipes at the samespeed.

Combination switch or rain sensor is malfunctioning.


X Remove the key from ignition lock.

X Insert the key into the ignition lock, turn to position 1 andstart the engine.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

7 Red warning lamplights up forsix seconds after start-ing the engine (certaincountries only).Warning tone sounds.

Warning lamp prompts driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.

X Fasten seat belts.

7 Red warning lamplights up after startingthe engine.

Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.


7 Red warning lampflashes.Warning tone sounds.

Driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt and thevehicle is travelling faster than 20 km/h.


6 Red warning lamplights up while theengine is running.Colour display: Mal‐function Visit work‐shop appears.

Restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNING

If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint systemcomponents may be triggered unintentionally or may notdeploy as intended during an accident. This may affect the seatbelt tensioner or airbag, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.

Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately ata qualified specialist workshop.

4 Indicator lamp onthe overhead controlpanel lights up.

The front-passenger front airbag has been deactivated(Y page 39).

X Activate front-passenger front airbag.

Visibility, occupants, airbags 181

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


Front-passenger front airbag has not been deactivated and ismalfunctioning.

X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front-passenger seat.

X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

× Indicator lamp onthe overhead controlpanel lights up.

The front-passenger front airbag is enabled (Y page 39). The air-bag system is operating correctly.

X Do not use a rearward-facing child restraint system on front-passenger seat.

× Indicator lamp onthe overhead controlpanel does not light upif the front-passengerfront airbag has beenactivated manually.

Malfunction in the airbag system.

X Do not allow passengers to travel on the front-passenger seat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine, brakes, transmission


Engine will not startusing the key.

Steering lock is manually locked.

X Remove the key from the ignition lock and then reinsert it intothe ignition lock.

X Turn the key.X Turn the steering wheel left and right.

þ Red warning lamplights up.Warning tone sounds.Without starting motor again, visit workshop appears.

Serious malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system.The engine can no longer be started.

X Do not restart the engine.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

þ Red warning lamplights up.Stop Switch off motor appears.

High-voltage electrical system, engine or high-voltage battery ismalfunctioning.

X Switch off the engine.X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

182 Engine, brakes, transmission>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


þ Red warning lamplights up.Warning tone sounds.Stop appears.

Communication with the engine's control unit is disrupted.


þ Yellow warninglamp lights up.Warning tone sounds.Malfunction Visit workshop appears.

Malfunction in the high-voltage electrical system. The vehicle'shigh-voltage electrical system may become damaged if you con-tinue running the engine.


þ Red warning lamplights up.Warning tone sounds.Reduce speed appears.

Speed of the vehicle is above 135 km/h.

X Reduce speed to below 135 km/h.

lights up.Do not tow vehicle with wheels on ground appears.

Drive system or high-voltage electrical system is faulty.

X Have the vehicle transported by a qualified specialist work-shop.

X Do not tow away the vehicle on its own wheels.

J Red warning lamplights up while theengine is running.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Check brake fluid levelappears.

Brake fluid level is too low.

G WARNING

If the brake fluid level is too low the brake system may fail.There is a risk of an accident.

Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.Secure the vehicle by applying the parking brake. Do not driveany further. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately and have the brake system repaired.

Do not top up the brake fluid, as this will not rectify the fault.


J Red warning lamplights up while driv-ing.Warning tone sounds.Colour display:Release parking brake appears.

Parking brake is applied.

X Release the parking brake.

Engine, brakes, transmission 183

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


J Red warning lamplights up while theengine is running.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Brake system malfunction Stop appears.

Serious malfunction in the brake system.


J Yellow warninglamp lights up.Colour display: Mal‐function Visit work‐shop appears.

Malfunction in the vacuum supply of the brake system.


Monochrome display:i or j flash alter-nately in the middle ofthe display.Colour display: To start engine: shift to P or N appears.

An attempt was made to start the engine with the transmission inposition h or k.

X Select j or i to start.

Monochrome display:j or h/k, i flashalternately.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Risk of vehicle rolling away Transmission not in P appears.Warning tone sounds.

The driver's door is open and the selector lever is in position k,i or h.

G WARNING

The vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident.

X Select position j.X Switch off the engine.X Close the driver's door completely.

¯ or ° warninglamp flashes for a fewseconds after startingthe engine.Colour display: Next service due in … kmor Service due … days ago appears.

A service due date is approaching or has already passed:R¯ indicates a minor service.R° indicates a full service.


184 Engine, brakes, transmission>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.

Charging process


The charge socket flapcannot be opened.

The charge socket flap is not unlocked.

X Press the # button on the key.

The key batteries are discharged.

X Opening a door with the emergency release

The charging cablecannot be plugged intothe vehicle socket.

The vehicle socket is locked.

X Make sure that the selector lever is in position j.

on the vehiclesocket flashes red. Thehigh-voltage batteryis not being charged.

A fault occurred while initializing the charging process.

X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mainssocket.

X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehiclesocket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds.

X If the malfunction should persist, inform a qualified specialistworkshop.

on the vehiclesocket remains offafter the chargingcable connector hasbeen connected to thevehicle socket. Whencharging using a mainssocket, the high-volt-age battery is notcharged.

There is a malfunction at the mains socket.

X Have the mains socket checked to ensure that it is workingcorrectly.

orX Use a different mains socket.

è lights up.Warning tone sounds.Charger cable con‐nected appears.

The charging cable is plugged into the vehicle socket. The enginecannot be started.

X Before driving off, disconnect the charging cable from thevehicle socket and stow it away in the vehicle.

è flashes.Charging cable not inserted correctlyappears.

The charge cable is connected to the vehicle socket. The battery isnot being charged.

X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into thesockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis-connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnectit.

If the message continues to be displayed:


Charging process 185

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


The charging cableconnector cannot beremoved from the vehi-cle socket.

The charging cable connector is not unlocked.

X Press the # button on the key.This unlocks the charging cable connector in the vehiclesocket.

X Remove charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.

Charging not possi‐ble Power supply interrupted appears.

The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charge currentwas interrupted during the charging process.

X Make sure that the charging cable is plugged into the mainssocket.

X Disconnect the charging cable connector from the vehiclesocket and plug it back into the vehicle socket after 30 seconds.



Charging not possi‐ble s. Owner's Man‐ual appears.

Communication with the charging point infrastructure is notfunctioning correctly.

X Make sure that the charging cable is correctly plugged into thesockets on the vehicle and power connection. If necessary, dis-connect the charging cable from the sockets and then reconnectit.


X Use a different charging station.



þ Yellow warninglamp lights up.Charging not possi‐ble Visit workshopappears.

The vehicle electronics are malfunctioning. The high-voltagebattery cannot be charged.


þ Yellow warninglamp lights up.Charging not possi‐ble s. Owner's Man‐ual appears.

The high-voltage battery cannot be charged. The charging cableconnector is overheated.

X Remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket.X Allow the charging cable connector to cool off for several

minutes.X Plug the charging cable back into the vehicle socket.



186 Charging process>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


The indicator lamp onthe vehicle chargingsocket does not lightup. The high-voltagebattery is not beingcharged.

The vehicle is inactive.

X Activate the vehicle by pressing the # button on the key andlock it again.

The charging cablecannot be removed.

The vehicle is in charging mode or has completed active charging.

X Unlock the charging lock by pressing the # button on the key.

Charging process 187

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z

Driving safety systems


! Yellow warninglamp lights up.Colour display: System inoperative appears.

ABS is malfunctioning. Other driving systems may be deactiva-ted.If ABS is faulty, there is also a possibility that other driving sys-tems may be unavailable.Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp and displaymessages which may be shown in the instrument cluster.

G WARNING

If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when braking. The steer-ability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systems are deactivated.There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents.

Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including drivingsafety systems, will also become inoperative. Observe the infor-mation on the ABS warning lamp and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster.


X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

J Red warning lamplights up while theengine is running.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Brake force distribution inoperative. Stop See Owner's Manualappears.

EBD is malfunctioning. This means that ABS, ESP®, CrosswindAssist and Hill start assist are also unavailable.Other driving systems may be deactivated.

G WARNING

The brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock early ifyou brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance may increase in emergency brak-ing situations.

If ESP® is not operational, the vehicle will not be stabilised byESP®.The danger of skidding and having an accident increases.


X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

188 Driving safety systems>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


÷ Monochrome dis-play: yellow warninglamp lights up whilethe engine is running.÷ Colour display:yellow warning lamplights up.System inoperativeappears.

ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Other driving systemsmay be deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi-cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Brake lamps may be inoperative and thus no longer working whenbraking.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions. Do not drive on.

X Check that the brake lamps are working.

The brake lamps are not working.


Brake lamps are working.

X Drive on carefully.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

÷ Colour display:yellow warning lamplights up.Brake Assist System (BAS) inoperativeappears.

The Brake Assist System (BAS) is inoperative.


÷ Yellow warninglamp flashes whiledriving.

ESP® is intervening because there is a risk of skidding or at leastone of the wheels is spinning.

X Pull away carefully.X Accelerate carefully whilst driving.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather condi-

tions.

÷ and C andother warning lampsare lit.Colour display: Elec‐tronics malfunction Visit workshopappears.

Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock orunlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start theengine.



Driving safety systems 189

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


Colour display: ÷Hill start assist inoperative appears.

Hill start assist is malfunctioning. Vehicle will not be held auto-matically when pulling away uphill and may start rolling imme-diately.

G WARNING

If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to stabilise the vehi-cle. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off.This increases the risk of skidding and an accident.

Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Other driving systems may be deactivated.

The brake system functions normally, but without hill startassist.


h Yellow warninglamp lights up whiledriving.Colour display: Cor‐rect tyre pressureappears.

The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the tyrepressure difference between the wheels is too great.

X Check tyre pressure.X Correct the tyre pressure.X Restart tyre pressure monitor.


Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


h Yellow warninglamp lights up whiledriving.Colour display: Tyre pressure Caution tyre malfunctionappears.

The tyre pressure monitor has detected a significant loss of pres-sure in at least one of the tyres.

G WARNING

Underinflated or overinflated tyres pose the following risks:

Rthe tyres may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.

Rthe tyres may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which maygreatly impair tyre traction.

Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking,may be greatly impaired.


Observe the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyrepressure of all the tyres:

Rat least every two weeks

Rwhen the load changes

Rbefore embarking on a longer journey

Rfor changed operating conditions, e.g. off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tyre pressure.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away.X Check tyres visually and, if necessary, follow the instructions

for flat tyres.X Check the tyre pressure and correct it if necessary.

h Yellow warninglamp flashes forapproximately oneminute and then stayslit.Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative appears.

The tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning or was not restartedafter a wheel change.

G WARNING

If you correct the tyre pressure without recalibrating the RunFlat Indicator, the system cannot issue a warning about adefective tyre in time. In the event of tyre pressure loss, thedriving characteristics and the steering and braking may begreatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

If you correct the tyre pressure, you must recalibrate the RunFlat Indicator.

X Restart tyre pressure monitor.

The display message continues to be displayed.


Driving safety systems 191

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


h Yellow warninglamp flashes forapproximately60 seconds and thenremains lit.Colour display: Tyre pressure monitor inoperative wheel sensors missingappears.

There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor of one or morewheels.

G WARNING

Risk of accident due to undetected tyre pressure losses. The sys-tem is possibly unable to recognise or register low tyre pressure.


Wheels have unsuitable tyre pressure sensors.

X Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors.

J Red warning lampis lit.÷, ! yellowwarning lamps light upwhile the engine isrunning.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Elec‐tronics malfunction Stop See Owner's Manual appears.

The following systems are malfunctioning:

RABS (anti-lock braking system)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)RCrosswind AssistRHill start assistFurther driving systems could be switched off automatically.

G WARNING

The risk of skidding and having an accident increases due tomalfunctioning driving safety systems.The brake system functions normally, but without the systemslisted. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard,for example.This will greatly impair the ability to steer and brake. The brak-ing distance may increase in emergency braking situations.




Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


Monochrome display:D yellow warninglamp lights up whilethe engine is running.

Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi-cult.

G WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.

X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

D Yellow warninglamp lights up whilethe engine is running.Colour display: Steer‐ing malfunction See Owner's ManualorElectronics mal‐function See Own‐er's Manual appears.

Power assistance may be malfunctioning, making steering diffi-cult.

G WARNING

You will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.

X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.

If you are able to steer safely:

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

If you are unable to steer safely:

X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driver assistance systems


· Red warning lampis lit.Warning tone sounds.

Collision warning detects an obstacle on the road.

X Pay careful attention to the road and traffic conditions and beready to brake.

· Red warning lampis lit.

Distance to the vehicle in front is too short for the current speed.

X Increase the distance.

^ Yellow warninglamp lights up whiledriving.Colour display: Active Brake Assist inoper‐

The sensors in the radiator trim are dirty.

X Clean the sensors.

Driver assistance systems 193

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z


ative or Electronics malfunction Visit workshop appears.

Environmental influences or error sources outside the system aretemporarily interfering with Active Brake Assist and radar-assisted recuperation. Possible causes:

Rheavy rain or snowRoperating temperature is too highRon-board voltage is too lowActive Brake Assist is automatically operational again when thecauses listed no longer apply.

Warning lamp remains lit:


X Clean the sensors.X Restart the engine.

Warning lamp still remains lit:


^ and C as wellas other warning lampsare lit.

Central vehicle electronics system is malfunctioning.After switching off the engine, it is no longer possible to lock orunlock the doors using the remote control on the key or to start theengine.



Ã flashes forapproximately3 seconds.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Lane Keeping Assist inop‐erative appears.

Windscreen is dirty in the camera's field of vision.


X Clean the windscreen.

Environmental influences are interfering with Lane KeepingAssist. Possible causes:

Rheavy rain or snow or thick fog is impairing visibilityRthe sun is low in the sky and shining directly onto the sensorRlane markings cannot be detectedLane Keeping Assist is automatically operational again when thecauses listed no longer apply.If the windscreen is clean and the causes listed do not apply, thenthe electronics are malfunctioning.

System electronics are faulty.


194 Driver assistance systems>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


¤ flashes for a max-imum of 5 seconds.Colour display: Ãgreen warning lampflashes for a maximumof 5 seconds.Warning tone sounds.

A lane boundary marking was crossed without using the turnsignal.

X Stay inside the lane boundary markings.X Use indicator before changing lanes.

¯ flashes forapproximately10 seconds.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: ¯Cruise control inop‐erative appears.

Cruise control is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically.


¯ flashes forapproximately10 seconds. C andother warning lampsare also lit.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Elec‐tronics malfunction Visit workshopappears.

Central vehicle electronics system and cruise control are mal-functioning. After switching off the engine, it is no longer pos-sible to lock or unlock the doors using the remote control on thekey or to start the engine.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention toroad and traffic conditions.


È lights up.Speed display flashes.Warning tone sounds.

Vehicle is exceeding the set limit speed.

X Brake the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions.

È flashes forapproximately10 seconds.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Lim‐iter inoperativeappears.

Speed limiter is malfunctioning and deactivates automatically.


Ò Warning lampflashes for a minute orlights up continuously.Colour display: Black ice warning appears.

The outside temperature has fallen to or below 3 °C. There is a riskof black ice.

X Adapt your driving style and speed to suit the weather condi-tions.

Driver assistance systems 195

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z

Battery, lights, heating


Rear window heatingor seat heatingswitches off automati-cally or cannot beswitched on.

Battery is not sufficiently charged.

X Switch off electrical consumers that are not required.

Ý Yellow warninglamp lights up.Battery reserve level appears.

The charge status of the high-voltage battery has dropped intothe reserve range.

X Charge the high-voltage battery.

Monochrome display:Ý Yellow warninglamp flashes.Colour display: ÝYellow warning lamplights up. Battery reserve levelappears.

Charge status of the high-voltage battery is below 10 %.


õ Display flashes.The vehicle hasswitched itself off.Battery charge too low Charge HV bat‐tery now appears.

The vehicle has switched itself off because the charge status ofthe high-voltage battery is too low. After restarting the vehicle,depending on the charge status of the high-voltage battery, thevehicle can only drive on a maximum of 1 km.

X Park the vehicle paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions.


# Red warning lamplights up when drivingor when the vehicle isready to start.Warning tone sounds.Colour display: Stop See Owner's Manualappears.

12 V battery is not being charged or the high-voltage battery ismalfunctioning.

X Do not drive on.The engine may switch itself off after a short while.


X Switch off the engine.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

It may not be possible to drive the vehicle further and it maynot be possible to restart the engine.

Colour display: #Warning lamp lightsup.Malfunction Visit workshop appears.

Battery monitoring is malfunctioning.


Monochrome display: b Warning lamplights up.

Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated.

X Switch off the engine.X Start the engine.

196 Battery, lights, heating>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.


Warning lamp remains lit.Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty.

G WARNING

Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps.The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road userswhen braking.



Warning lamp still remains lit.Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.

X Manually adjust exterior lighting.X Manually adjust windscreen wipers.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Colour display: bWarning lamp lightsup.Malfunction See Own‐er's Manual appears.

Dipped beam is on continuously. Main beam cannot be activated.

X Switch off the engine.X Restart the engine.

Warning lamp remains lit.Rain/light sensor is malfunctioning.

X Manually adjust exterior lighting.X Manually adjust windscreen wipers.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Colour display: bWarning lamp lightsup.Brake lamps inoper‐ative appears.

Brake lamps are inoperative. The bulb or LED is faulty.

G WARNING

Risk of accident due to faulty brake lamps.The brake lamps are faulty and no longer alert other road userswhen braking.



Colour display: Switch off lights appears.Warning tone sounds.

Lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle.

X Turn control knob for the lights to Ã or u.

Battery, lights, heating 197

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System

Bluetooth® connection


Bluetooth® connectioncannot be establishedbetween the smartAudio-System or smartMedia-System andmobile phone.

X Ascertain whether the mobile phone is compatible with thesystem. Information about compatible mobile phones:www.smart.com/connect

X Check the security settings on your mobile phone.X Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled on the smart

Audio-System or smart Media-system and on your mobilephone.

X Start the device search on the smart Audio-System or smartMedia-System and on the mobile phone.

The navigation system in the smart Media-System


No map is displayed inthe navigation system.

The SD card with the map data is missing or damaged.

X Check to see that the SD card is inserted.

Position of the vehiclein the navigation sys-tem does not match thevehicle's actual posi-tion.GPS symbol on the dis-play is grey or yellow.

GPS reception is poor.

X Drive the vehicle to another position where GPS reception isbetter.

The road's course in thenavigation system nolonger coincides withthe actual road.

The map data is out of date.

X Update the map data.

Navigation systemdoes not display anytraffic information.

Route guidance has not been started.

X Select a destination and start navigation.

HD Traffic is not available or the subscription for HD Traffic hasexpired.

X Check whether HD Traffic is available for the country you are inor upgrade the subscription for HD Traffic.

There are no naviga-tion messages duringroute guidance.

The road's course is not detected. The map data may be out of date.

X Check if route guidance has started.X If not, select a destination and start navigation.

Navigation messages are switched off.

X Switch on navigation messages.

198 smart Audio-System and smart Media-System>>

Pra

ctic

al a

dvi

ce.

Voice control system in the smart Media-System


The voice control sys-tem does not under-stand voice commands.

Interval for entering voice commands has been exceeded.

X Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel.

Voice commands have not been given from the driver's seat.

X Issue voice commands from the driver's seat.

Noise from the blower or wind noise are interfering with voicecommands.

X Avoid interfering noises.

Voice commands have not been given clearly.

X Say voice commands clearly.

Voice command is unknown.

X Say the command “Help”.A list of possible voice commands appears.

smart Audio-System and smart Media-System 199

>> P

ract

ical

ad

vice

.

Z

Obtaining technical data

Information on technical data:www.smart.deThe technical data was determined inaccordance with EC Directives. All dataapplies to the vehicle's standard equipment.Differences will be present in the case ofvehicles with optional equipment. Furtherinformation is available from any smartCentre.

Reading vehicle data

Useful information

RThe heights and lengths specified vary asa result of:- Tyres- Load- Condition of the suspension- Optional equipmentROptional equipment reduces the maximum

payloadRVehicle-specific weight information can

be found on the vehicle identificationplateROnly for certain countries: you can find

vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COCdocuments (EU CERTIFICATE OF CONFORM-ITY). These documents are delivered withyour vehicle.

Vehicle identification plate

: Vehicle identification plate position

: Vehicle identification plate; Paint code= Vehicle manufacturer? EU type approval numberA Vehicle identification number (VIN)B Maximum permissible gross weightC Maximum permissible front axle loadD Maximum permissible rear axle load

i The data shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate is example data. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviatefrom the data shown here. The data appli-cable to the vehicle is found on the vehi-cle's identification plate.

Dimensions and weights

Missing technical data was not available atthe time of publication.

smart forfour crosstownedition

Dimensions,weights andvolumes

Opening height : 2012 mm

Vehicle length 3512 mm

200 Reading vehicle data>>

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a.



Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

1875 mm

Vehicle width excludingexterior mirrors

1665 mm

Vehicle width excludingexterior mirrors forvehicles equipped withwheel trims

Vehicle height 1554 mm

Wheelbase 2494 mm

Maximum ground clear-ance

108 mm

Permissible roof load

Tank capacity Total: 35.0 lof whichreserve fuel:5.0 l






1875 mm


1665 mm



Wheelbase 2494 mm


108 mm

Permissible roof load

smart fortwo coupé elec-tric drive

Dimensions andweights




1893 mm


1663 mm



Wheelbase 1873 mm


113 mm

Maximum tailgate load

Permissible roof load 0 kg

smart fortwo cabrio elec-tric drive

Dimensions andweights



1893 mm


1663 mm



Wheelbase 1873 mm


110 mm

Maximum tailgate loadwithout side bars

Maximum tailgate loadwith sidebars

Permissible roof load 0 kg

Reading vehicle data 201

>> T

ech

nic

al d

ata.

Charging time


Type Lithium-ion

Charging time(from 20% to 100%)at 32 A / 230 V

Approx. 2 h30 min


Approx. 3 h30 min


Approx. 6 h


Approx. 9 h30 min

Charging cable

Charging the battery at a charging stationor wall box

Nominal voltage 400 V AC, 3-phase

Nominal frequency 50 Hz / 60 Hz

Nominal current 32 A

Charge output from 4.6 kW to22 kW

System of protection IP44 (inserted),IP24 (not inser-ted)

Outside temperature from -40 °C to+50 °C

Standards IEC 51851-1,IEC 62196-1,IEC 62186-2

Interface Type 2 to Type2

Also observe the identification plate on thecharge connector device.

Service products

Please note

Also observe the information in the section"Checking and refilling service products"(Y page 149).Vehicle components and their respectiveservice products must match. Therefore, onlyuse products tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Information on service products

The following table lists all technical datafor the service products of the vehicle. Fur-ther information on service products: http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com and in any smartcentre.

Service prod-ucts

Specifications

Corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze(Y page 149)

Recommended: G40

Windscreenwasher fluid(Y page 150)

Temperatures abovefreezing point: mixingratio of 1:100MB SummerFit to water.Temperatures belowfreezing point: for the cor-rect mixing ratio ofMB WinterFit and water,please observe the infor-mation on the antifreezecontainer.

Bulb types

The following table lists the correct bulbtypes of the vehicle:

Bulb Type

Dipped-beam/main-beamheadlamps

H4 60/55 W

Front foglamps H 16

Turn signals PY 21 W

202 Bulb types>>

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a.

Bulb Type

Side turn signal lamps WY 5 W

Licence plate lighting W 5 W

Interior lighting W 5 W

Tail lamps

Bulb Type

Tail lamp and brake lamp P21 5 W

Rear foglamp P21 W

Bulb Type

Reversing lamp W 16 W

Turn signals PY 21 W

Fuse allocation

No. Consumer Current Colour cod-ing

1 Starter motor 5 A Brown

2 Power steering control unit 5 A Brown

3 Multifunction lever 5 A Brown

4 Airbag 5 A Brown

5 Transmission control unit 25 A Cyan

6 Instrument cluster 10 A Red

7 Horn, alarm system 15 A Blue

8 Power supply control unit 10 A Red

9 Power supply control unit 10 A Red

Fuse allocation 203

>> T

ech

nic

al d

ata.


10 Central control unit 20 A Yellow

11 Central control unit 15 A Blue

12 Central control unit 10 A Red

13 Central control unit 15 A Blue

14 Power windows (automatic reversing feature) 30 A Green

15 ESP®, transmission control unit 5 A Brown

16 Interior lighting 10 A Red

17 Immobiliser 3 A Violet

18 Electrical exterior mirror 5 A Brown

19 Brake lamps 10 A Red

20 Cruise control, radio, belt warning 15 A Blue

21 Not smart electric drive: central control unit, fuelpump, injection

15 A Blue

22 Rear window wiper 15 A Blue

23 smart electric drive only: power supply controlunit

40 A Orange

24 ‑ ‑ ‑

25 Power supply control unit 30 A Green

26 Radio 20 A Yellow

27 Daytime driving lamps 5 A Brown

28 12 V socket, cigarette lighter 15 A Blue

29 Power supply control unit 5 A Brown

30 Forward collision warning 15 A Blue

31 Rear fog lamps ‑ ‑

32 Radio, central control unit 15 A Blue

33 Tail lamps, front foglamps, hazard warning lampbutton, locking button, headlamp range control,power windows, licence plate lighting, radio,control unit for heating or climate control system,cruise control, limiter, parking aid button, pro-gram selector button, tailgate release, Lane Keep-ing Assist camera, automatic start/stop systembutton

25 A Cyan

34 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan

35 Headlamps, daytime driving lamps 25 A Cyan

204 Fuse allocation>>

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a.


36 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red

37 Right-hand dipped beam 10 A Red

38 Left-hand dipped beam, central control unit 10 A Red

39 - 42 ‑ ‑ ‑

43 Exterior mirror heating 5 A Brown

44 Automatic reversing feature 25 A Cyan

45 Power supply control unit 25 A Cyan

46 Radio amplifier 20 A Yellow

47 - 49 ‑ ‑ ‑

Radio type approvals for the tyre pres-sure monitors

Country Radio type approval number

Argen-tina

MW2433AH-12337GG4H-12338

Brazil 2770-12-8001Model: MW2433A0381-13-8001Model: GG4

AbuDhabiDubai

TRA, Registered-NOER0092100/12TRA, Registered-NOER0099792/12TRA, Registered-NOER0076990/11Dealer-NO: DA0047074/10

Country Radio type approval number

Jordan Model: Gen Alpha Wal 2 TPMStransmitterType Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/114Model: Gen Gamma Gen4 433.92 MHz.Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2012/190Model: Corax 3 MRXMC34MA4Type Approval Number:TRC/LPD/2011/158Type Number: LPD

Morocco MR7319 ANRT 2012/ 11/07/2012MR7672 ANRT 2012/ 23/11/2012MR6706 ANRT 2011

Moldova 1024

Philip-pines

No: ESD-1206394CNo: ESD-1306871C

Serbia И 011 12

Singa-pore

Compliance with IDA StandardDA- 103365

SouthAfrica

TA-2012/719TA-2012/1540TA-2011/1370

Radio type approvals for the tyre pressure monitors 205

>> T

ech

nic

al d

ata.

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones

G WARNING

The electromagnetic radiation from two-way radios can interfere with the vehicleelectronics if they are manipulated or ret-rofitted incorrectly. This could jeopardisethe operating safety of the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.

You should have all work on electrical andelectronic components carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING

If you operate two-way radios incorrectlyin the vehicle, their electromagnetic radi-ation can interfere with the vehicle elec-tronics, for example if:

Rthe two-way radio is not connected to anexterior aerial

Rthe exterior aerial is not correctly moun-ted or is not low-reflection

This could jeopardise the operating safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fit-ted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating two-way radios in thevehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial.

! Only have work carried out on the engineelectronics and its associated parts, suchas control units, sensors, actuating com-ponents and connector leads, at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Vehicle componentsmay otherwise wear more quickly and thevehicle's operating permit may be invali-dated.

! The operating permit may be invalidatedif the instructions for installation and useof two-way radios are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust be complied with:

Ronly approved wavebands may be usedRobserve the maximum permissible out-

put in these wavebandsRonly approved aerial positions may be

used

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radia-tion can cause damage to health. The use ofan exterior aerial takes into considerationthe scientific discussion surrounding thepossible health risk posed by electromag-netic fields.The following aerial positions may be usedfor the correct installation of two-wayradios:

: Front roof area; Rear roof area

Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609(Road Vehicles – EMC guidelines for instal-lation of aftermarket radio frequency trans-mitting equipment) when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal require-ments for add-on parts.If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply and aerialconnections intended for use in the basicwiring. Be sure to observe the manufacturer'sadditional instructions during installation.Deviations with respect to wavebands, max-imum transmission outputs or aerial posi-tions must be approved by smart.

206 Installing two-way radios and mobile phones>>

Tec

hn

ical

dat

a.

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) atthe base of the aerial must not exceed thefollowing values:

Waveband Maximum transmission

output

Tetra380 - 410 MHz

20 W

Mobile communicationsgeneration 2G/3G/4G

6 W

The following can be used in the vehiclewithout restrictions:

RTwo-way radios with a maximum trans-mission output of up to 100 mWRMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There are no restrictions when positioningthe aerial on the outside of the vehicle for thefollowing wavebands:

RTetraRMobile communications (2G/3G/4G)

Installing two-way radios and mobile phones 207

>> T

ech

nic

al d

ata.

Z

208

Publication details

Internet

Further information about smart vehiclesand about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.smart.comhttp://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries orsuggestions you may have regarding thisOwner's Manual to the technical documen-tation team at the following address:Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service,70546 Stuttgart, Germany©Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany

Symbols in the Owner's ManualThe following symbols are used in this Own-er's Manual:

G WARNING

Warning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.


Environmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally awareactions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i These symbols indicate useful instruc-tions or further information that could behelpful to you.

X Instructions that must be followed.

X Several consecutive symbols indicate aninstruction with several consecutive steps.

(Y page) Further information on a topic

YY A warning or an instruction that is con-tinued on the next page.Display text: Display text in the instru-ment cluster display, the smart Audio-Sys-tem or the smart Media-System.

As at 13.06.2017

>> Owner's Manualsmart fortwo coupé and smart fortwo cabrio electric drive

É4535841112"ËÍ

4535

8411

12

Ord

er n

o. 6

522

0254

02

Part

no.

453

584

11

12Ed

itio

n Ä

J201

7-1b

www.smart.com smart - A Daimler brand Ow

ner

's M

anu

al, s

mar

t fo

rtw

o co

up

é an

d s

mar

t fo

rtw

o ca

bri

o el

ectr

ic d

rive

Documents

>> Owner's Manual - Daimler AG